JP7328717B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to the technology of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique of providing a displacement member that can be displaced between a first position in which a game ball can easily pass and a second position in which a game ball cannot pass easily with respect to a passage area. is publicly known. For example, it is as described in Patent Document 1. In the technique described in Patent Document 1, a sliding attacker is provided as the displacement member. The slide type attacker is configured to be movable so as to protrude from the game board toward the player side. A linear solenoid is used as the drive source for moving the slide attacker. In this way, the sliding attacker can use the driving force generated by the solenoid to move so as to protrude from the game board toward the player.

JP 2014-18304 A

In the conventional pachinko machine, the solenoid is arranged on the back side of the slide attacker, and the direction in which the plunger moves is the same as the direction in which the slide attacker moves. Such a configuration requires a large space in the depth direction of the pachinko machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be made compact in the depth direction.

The problems to be solved by the present invention are as described above, and the means for solving these problems will now be described.

A game machine according to the present invention comprises a game board having a game area in which game balls roll, a passage area through which game balls can pass, and a first position where game balls can easily pass through the passage area. A displacement member that can be displaced to a second position where passage of a game ball is difficult, a driving means for driving the displacement member, a guide path for guiding the game ball to the passage area, and a fraud that detects a predetermined fraud. detection means, wherein the driving means can generate a force that drives the displacement member in a direction different from the direction in which the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position. a driving direction changing means for changing the direction of the force generated by the driving means to a direction of movement from the first position to the second position, wherein the displacement member is coupled to the driving direction changing means; The drive means is arranged on the front side from the end of the drive direction changing means on the back side of the game machine, and the fraud detection means is such that at least a part of the fraud detection means is the drive means and the drive means. The driving direction changing means is disposed on the front side of the game machine back side end portion of the driving direction changing means, and the driving direction changing means is configured such that when the displacement member is at the first position, at least part of the driving direction changing means The fraud detection means is arranged on the rear side of the front end of the game machine, and when the displacement member is at the second position, at least a part of the driving direction changing means is activated by the fraud detection means. The connecting portion is arranged to be located on the front side of the end portion of the front side of the machine, and the connecting portion is positioned closer to the front side of the game machine than the end portion of the fraud detection means when the displacement member is at the first position. At least part of the guide path is arranged on the rear side, and the guide path is composed of the displacement member arranged so that at least part of it overlaps vertically with the driving means, and can reduce the moving speed of the game ball. and a second guideway having a second deceleration means different from the first deceleration means capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball. , the game ball flowing down the second guideway can join a predetermined position of the first guideway.

According to the present invention, the depth direction can be made compact.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, the disassembled perspective view which shows an external appearance. Similarly, the front view which shows the appearance of a game board. Similarly, the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special pattern display part. Similarly, a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (b) A table showing specifications of a normal symbol game. (c) A table showing distribution of hits. (d) A table showing types of hits. Similarly, a flow chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 7; Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt processing performed by a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special design control processing which is executed with the main control circuit. Similarly, a flow chart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main control circuit. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 15; Similarly, a flowchart showing a winning start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a big winning opening re-open waiting time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a big winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a winning end interval process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by a sub-control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub-control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the sub-control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub-control circuit. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 25; The front perspective view which shows a normal electric accessories unit. The front exploded perspective view which shows a normal electric accessories unit. The front view of the base member of the normal electric accessory unit. The front perspective view of the base member of the normal electric accessories unit. Front cross-sectional view of the ordinary electric accessories unit. Front cross-sectional perspective view of a normal electric accessories unit. The front perspective view which shows an attacker unit. The front view which shows an attacker unit. The side view which shows an attacker unit. The top view which shows an attacker unit. The front exploded perspective view which shows an attacker unit. The front view which shows the base member of an attacker unit. The back view which shows the front side board part of an attacker unit. Front sectional drawing which shows an attacker unit. FIG. 3 is a front cross-sectional perspective view of the attacker unit; (a) A plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid. (b) A plan view showing a link arm. (c) A plan view showing a shutter. (a) A plan view showing the attacker unit when the shutter is at the second position. (b) Similarly, a plan view showing the special electric accessory. (a) A plan view showing the attacker unit when the shutter is at the first position. (b) Similarly, a plan view showing the special electric accessory. (a) A schematic plan view showing how a game ball rolls on the first guideway of the attacker unit. (b) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing a continuation of FIG. 45(a). (c) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing how a plurality of game balls roll. Front cross-sectional view showing the mutual positional relationship between the ordinary electric accessory and the attacker unit. Partial front view showing a game ball rolling in the game area. (a) A cross-sectional front view showing how a game ball rolls on a normal electric accessory unit. (b) Similarly, a front cross-sectional view showing a continuation of FIG. 48(a). Partial front view showing a game ball rolling in the game area. (a) A cross-sectional front view showing how a game ball rolls on an attacker unit. (b) Similarly, a front cross-sectional view showing a continuation of FIG. 50(a). (a) A cross-sectional front view showing how a game ball rolls on an attacker unit. (b) Similarly, a front cross-sectional view showing a continuation of FIG. 51(a). (a) A schematic plan view showing how a game ball rolls on a first guideway of an attacker unit according to another example. (b) Similarly, a schematic side view. (a) A schematic plan view showing a continuation of FIG. 52(a). (b) Similarly, a schematic side view. The front view which shows the second movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which removed the 1st movable body (excluding a base member) from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which removed the 1st movable body from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear view showing the second movable accessory unit. A plan view showing a second movable accessory unit. A rear perspective view showing a second movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows a 1st movable body (except a base member). The front exploded perspective view which shows the movable body of a 1st movable body. The rear view which shows the movement control means of a 1st movable body. The rear view showing how the movable body is moved from the standby position to the effect position. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the first movable body (excluding the base member) in a state where the movable body is in the production position; The front exploded perspective view which shows a 2nd movable body. The front view which shows a movement control means. The front view which showed a mode that the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body were moved to the production|presentation position from a standby position. The front view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body (only a base member) and the 2nd movable body exist in the production|presentation position. The front view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body exist in the production|presentation position. The back view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body exist in the production|presentation position. The top view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body exist in the production|presentation position. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view showing the state of the arm when the first movable body is at the standby position; FIG. 4 is a schematic front view showing the state of the arm when the first movable body is at the highest position; FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing the state of the arm when the first movable body is at the production position; The front view which showed the inside (base member and board|substrate) of the second movable body. The enlarged front view which showed the connector and flat cable of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective cross-sectional view showing the butted portion of the second movable body (SS cross section in FIG. 75); Similarly, a side cross-sectional view (SS cross section of FIG. 75). FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view showing the detailed shape of the butted portion of the second movable body; (a) The top view which shows the structure of a flat cable. (b) Similarly, a side view. (c) Similarly, a bottom view. The front view which showed the state by which the flat cable was connected normally. The front view which showed the state which the flat cable was not connected normally. (a) Side cross-sectional view showing a first modification of the butted portion of the second movable body. (b) Similarly, the side sectional view which showed the 2nd modification. (c) Similarly, the side sectional view which showed the 3rd modification. The front view which showed the inside (base member and board|substrate) of the movable body. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the board of the movable body, the connector, and the flat cable; FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a base member to which a substrate is attached; The back view which showed the modification of the second movable body. The perspective view which showed the production|presentation apparatus which concerns on 1st embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, front cross-sectional view. Likewise, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, the right front exploded perspective view. Likewise, left front exploded perspective view. The right side view of a base member. Left side view of the reel seat. The right side view which showed the base member and the reel seat. A1-A1 sectional view. The right front exploded perspective view which showed the production|presentation apparatus which concerns on a modification. The right side view similarly showing the base member, the reel seat, and the left side attachment member. B1-B1 sectional view. The perspective view which showed the production|presentation apparatus based on 2nd embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, front cross-sectional view. Likewise, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, the right front exploded perspective view. Likewise, left front exploded perspective view. The right side view of a base member. Left side view of the reel seat. The right side view which showed the base member and the reel seat. A2-A2 sectional view. The right front exploded perspective view which showed the production|presentation apparatus which concerns on a modification. The right side view similarly showing the base member, the reel seat, and the left side attachment member. B2-B2 sectional view. The perspective view which showed the production|presentation apparatus which concerns on 3rd embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, front cross-sectional view. Likewise, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, the right front exploded perspective view. Likewise, left front exploded perspective view. The right side view of a base member. Left side view of the reel seat. The right side view which showed the base member, the reel seat, and the left side attachment member. A3-A3 sectional view. B3-B3 sectional view. (a) A right side view showing an overlapping portion that is not pressed by a pressing portion. (b) A right side view showing a state in which the overlapping portion is deformed. The right front perspective view showing the game ball sorting device. Similarly, the right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, the right rear exploded perspective view. The rear perspective view which showed the base member, the rotation distribution mechanism, the cloon, and the guide member. The front exploded perspective view which showed the guide member and the pressing member. The figure which showed the state in which the game ball is distributed to the 2nd path|passage. The figure which showed the flow of the game ball distributed to the 2nd path, the 3rd path, and the 4th path. The figure which showed the state in which the game ball is distributed to the 1st path|passage. Front perspective view showing a game ball sorting device. The top view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus which concerns on another embodiment.

[Configuration of game machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG.
In the following description, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the front side is defined as the front side, and the back side is defined as the rear side. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, thereby defining the left-right direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18 and a board. A unit 19 is provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11 . The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the game board 17 on the front side. To support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 22 is provided in the glass door 13 . A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13 . The protective glass 23 is arranged to face a game board 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12 . A speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged above the glass door 13 . The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, presentation, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for, for example, notifying with light or performing effects.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The tray unit 14 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13 .

The upper plate 26 is for storing game balls to be shot to the game area 20, which will be described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and a performance button 62. - 特許庁The payout port 61 is for lending game balls and paying out (prize balls). The payout port 61 discharges game balls when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. - 特許庁A payout port 63 is provided in the lower plate 27 . The payout port 63, like the payout port 63 of the upper tray 26, is for renting game balls and paying out (prize balls). The payout port 63 discharges the game balls when the game balls overflow from the upper tray 26.例文帳に追加

The shooting device 15 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 26 to the game area 20 . The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 12 and the lower right portion of the pan unit 14 . The firing device 15 comprises a panel body 31 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 32 .

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15 . The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31 . The driving device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the shooting device 15, when the shooting handle 32 is operated by the player, game balls are shot by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an identification pattern (decorative pattern) for production, a production image during a big win, a demonstration production image, and the number of suspension times of variable display of identification patterns. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 described later).

The game board 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23 . On the front side of the game board 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a stage 42, a game ball sorting device 5400 (first start port 5442), a normal electric accessory unit 400 (second start port 440 and a normal electric role product). 460), passage gate 49, attacker unit 500 (large prize winning port 540 and special electric accessory 600), general prize winning ports 53, 54, 450, out port 55, LED unit 70, decorative member 56, movable accessory unit 57. equip.

The guide rail 41 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 41a" and "inner rail 41b"). The outer rail 41 a mainly partitions (defines) the game area 20 . The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. - 特許庁The inner rail 41b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 41a. The inner rail 41b is arranged on the left side of the game board 17 inside the outer rail 41a.

The stage 42 divides the game ball flow-down area in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the stage 42 . The stage 42 is arranged above the game area 20 . The stage 42 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. Inside (inner peripheral side) of the stage 42, the game board 17 is opened and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed.

The game ball shot by the shooting device 15 flows down the game board 17 while changing its traveling direction by colliding with the stage 42 and the game nail 68 driven into the game board 17 . The shot game balls are distributed to the flow-down areas according to the amount of operation of the shooting handle 32. - 特許庁Specifically, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 32 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left side of the stage 42 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 32 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right side of the stage 42 . A hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the stage 42 is called "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the stage 42 is called "right hitting".

The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device for appropriately distributing game balls to the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 . The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged substantially in the lower center of the game area 20 .

The first starting port 5442 gives the opportunity for the hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to display on the display unit 74 . A first starting port switch 5472 is arranged in the first starting port 5442 (see FIG. 5). When the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472. - 特許庁When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is dispensed (discharged) from the dispensing port 63 to the upper tray 26 or the lower tray 27 . In addition, winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by hitting to the left.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be given later.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 .

The second starting port 440 gives the opportunity for the hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to display on the display unit 74 . A second start port switch 441 is arranged in the second start port 440 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball enters the second starting port 440 , the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are Alternatively, it is dispensed (discharged) from the dispensing port 63 to the upper tray 26 or the lower tray 27 . The winning difficulty of the second starting port 440 is determined by the normal electric accessory 460 . It should be noted that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by hitting to the right.

The normal electric accessory 460 includes a wing member 461 that can rotate in the horizontal direction, and a starting solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the wing member 461 . The ordinary electric accessory 460 is arranged above the second starting port 440 . The normal electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the passage of game balls is easy and a closed state in which the passage of game balls is difficult, by driving the blade member 461 by the starting solenoid 462. configured to When a game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the normal electric accessory 460, the game ball is won in the second starting port 440. - 特許庁The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 461) is performed only for a predetermined period and times when the normal pattern in the normal pattern display portion 71 is in a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is arranged on the central right part of the game board 17 and above the normal electric accessory unit 400 . The pass gate 49 is provided with a pass gate switch 49a (see FIG. 5). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). It should be noted that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 is performed by hitting to the right.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the normal electric accessory unit 400 .

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a winning game state (big winning game state or small winning game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is such that the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the winning game state (jackpot game state or It is performed when it is shifted to a small hit game state).

The general prize winning openings 53 and 54 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board 17 while being spaced apart from each other. Also, the general prize winning port 450 is provided in the normal electric accessory unit 400 . The general winning openings 53, 54, 450 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball enters the general winning opening 53/54/450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a/54a/451. When game balls are detected by the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, and 451, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27). is done).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for the first start hole 5442 and the second start hole 440 is 3, the number of prize balls for the general prize holes 53, 54, and 450 is 10, and the number of prize balls for the big prize hole 540 The numbers are set to 15 each. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 55 is arranged at the bottom center of the game board 17 . The out port 55 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not enter each winning (starting) port such as the first starting port 5442 .

The LED unit 70 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 17 and outside the guide rail 41 . The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display parts are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display portions, a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol reservation display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special A design pending display portion 75 and a second special symbol pending display portion 76 are provided.

The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to be in the open state according to the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated alternately when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in an open state, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port The winning difficulty of the game ball to 440 is changed.

The normal symbol suspension display section 72 displays the number of execution times of suspended normal symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "suspension number of normal symbol variation display"). The normal symbol reservation display unit 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol suspension display unit 72 displays the number of suspension times of normal symbol variation display by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which transition or maintenance of the game state is determined according to the result of determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 has a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 5442 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 73a, when a predetermined condition for starting variable display is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can enter the big winning hole 540 is established. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 has a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 74a, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can enter the big winning hole 540 is established. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the normal A transition from a game state (normal game state) to a winning game state which is advantageous to the player is determined. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big win, the game state is shifted to a big win game state as a win game state. Also, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the game state is shifted to a small hit game state as a hit game state. Thus, in this embodiment, two types of winning game states are provided as the game state to be shifted from the normal game state.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 75 and the second special symbol reserved display unit 76 display the number of executions of variable display of reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "number of times of variable display of special symbols"). to display. The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol suspension display portion 75 and the second special symbol suspension display portion 76 display the number of suspension times of special symbol variation display by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b. The display modes of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the reserved display portion 72 for normal symbols.

The decoration member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17 . The decoration member 56 is arranged on the upper part of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 . The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. The front side (player side) of the decorative member 56 is decorated with logos (characters), characters, symbols, and the like. The decorative member 56 is configured to emit light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body in which a movable accessory, a driving source, and the like, which will be described later, are integrated. The movable accessory unit 57 can enhance the interest of the player by performing a predetermined effect operation using the movable accessory. In this embodiment, the movable role product unit 57 includes a first movable role product unit (production device 2400), a second movable role product unit 82, and a third movable role product unit 83.

The first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400 ) is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 .
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400) will be given later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is arranged above the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56 .
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be given later.

The third movable accessory unit 83 is arranged on the right and left sides of the game board 17 behind the stage 42, respectively. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) imitating a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be movable. Also, the hand accessory 86 is configured to be lightable. Most of the hand accessory 86 is hidden behind the game board 17 and the stage 42 in a standby state (a state in which no performance action is performed) as shown in FIG. 3, making it difficult for the player to see. In addition, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (the state in which the effect is being performed), so that the player can easily recognize the hand accessory 86 .

Below, in the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. In addition, when the game ball wins to the first start port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game to the first start port 5442 is continued until the first special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the win of the ball is suspended. After that, when the first special symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the suspended first special symbol is variably displayed.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 is started. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the game to the second starting port 440 is continued until the second special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the second special symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the suspended first special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change simultaneously. That is, while the special symbols are variably displayed in one of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols are not variably displayed in the other display portion. . In this embodiment, when the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, the start winning to the second starting port 440 is given priority, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols is 8 times, which is the sum of the number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols due to the winning of first start port 5442 and second start port 440 .

Also, while the first or second special symbols are changing in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, except for specific cases, the identification symbols consisting of numbers on the liquid crystal display device 16 fluctuate. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped and displayed. Is displayed. The identification pattern is also used as identification information for presentation.

In addition, when the first or second special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 are in a specific stop display mode, the player is informed of the winning. An effect image to cause is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, the specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stop-displayed is set corresponding to the type of win. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. form. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to the winning. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are displayed in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize them, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of winning.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
The control circuit of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 for controlling the game and a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like.

The main CPU 101 is connected with a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 102 .

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101 . In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information of the special symbol game is stored as starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 103 has a first special symbol start memory area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and the upper limit of four first special symbol games. A first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start memory area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory, and the upper limit four times of the second special game. A second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101 . The I/O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits commands from the main CPU 101 to the sub-control circuit 200 . The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is cut off.

Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100 .

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol pending display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special symbol pending display portion 75, A second special symbol reservation display unit 76, a starting solenoid 462 for driving the vane member 461 of the normal electric accessory 460, and a large winning solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610 are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 100 also includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

In addition, the main control circuit 100 is connected to the first starting switch 5472, the second starting switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general prize winning switches 53a, 54a, 451, and the like. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the member. Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100 . The payout/shooting control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for putting out game balls, a shooting device 350 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, It controls the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. Also, when the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the payout/shooting control circuit 300 applies power to the shooting solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation). It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, a sub-control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106 . The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 16, control of sound generated from the speaker 24, control of light from the lamp 25, and the like, according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. FIG.

In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, but a signal cannot be supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. It may be configured such that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100 .

The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 100 . Also, the sub-control circuit 200 is connected with a production button switch 310 that is turned on and off by operating the production button 62 .

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202 . In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100 .

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer-readable storage medium having control means is used. If so, another mode may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the programs, tables, etc. may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like, instead of being recorded in advance. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201 . In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16 . The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that buffers image data, and an image signal that converts image data into an image signal. It includes a D/A converter or the like that converts as

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification pattern image data showing identification patterns, background image data, image data for effect, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this manner, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 24 . The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and produces sound from the speaker 24 .

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamps 25 including decorative lamps and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role product control circuit 207 is for controlling the movable role product units 57 (first movable role product unit (production device 2400), second movable role product unit 82, and third movable role product unit 83). circuit. The role product control circuit 207 includes a driving circuit for supplying a driving signal to the movable role product unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role product in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. It has a data ROM and the like.

Also, the drive circuit selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM according to the role product activation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected motion pattern is read from the role product data ROM, and the mechanical motion of the movable role product unit 57 is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 6 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. Also, FIG. 6(b) is a table showing specifications of the normal symbol game. Also, FIG. 6(c) is a table showing the allocation of winnings. FIG. 6(d) is a table showing the types of wins. The data of the tables shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are stored in the main ROM 102 as tables.

Incidentally, in the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. Thus, in the special symbol game, the game state in which the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state is simply referred to as a low probability state (or a normal state or a non-variable probability state). Also, in the special symbol game, a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or probability variable state). In this way, when the game state becomes the probability variable state, a state more advantageous than the normal state is given to the player.

Also, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit, the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 (normal winning game) is performed for a relatively long time. Thus, in the normal symbol game, a game state in which the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened for a relatively long time is called an electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than when not in the electric support state. Thus, the state in which the electric sapo state and the time per normal symbol determination is performed in a short time is referred to as a time-saving state. It should be noted that the high probability state of the normal symbol determination is constituted so as to be able to shift when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit or the like. In addition, the high probability state of normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as when the time saving state ends.

Incidentally, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a game state other than the time saving state. Thus, the game state (game state other than the time saving state) in which the normal symbol determination is not performed is called a normal state (or a non-time saving state). In this way, when the game state becomes the time saving state, a state more advantageous than the non-time saving state is given to the player. In addition, the time-saving state is continued until, for example, the hit determination (big hit determination and small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times after shifting from the normal state.

As described above, the normal state indicates a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed with a low probability in the special symbol game, and a game state in which the normal symbol determination is not performed in the normal symbol game.

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6(a).

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot probability) is the first start port 5442 and the second In any case of the start winning of the starting port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (1 coefficient for 200 random numbers). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (variable probability state) is 1/100 (for 200 random 2 coefficients). In addition, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a hit due to the start winning of the second start port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random numbers) set. It should be noted that the small hit determination by the starting winning prize of the first starting port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small winning game is started based on the game ball winning the second starting port 440 is based on the game ball winning the first starting port 5442 and the small winning game is started. is set higher than the probability of

In addition, the number of times of ST is commonly set to 100 times even in the case of a big hit due to any of the starting winning prizes of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 . It should be noted that ST (special time) is a probability variable state that ends according to the number of times (cutting times). In the following, unless otherwise specified, "times" indicates the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after shifting to the variable probability state.

Note that the number of STs is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probability variable state, which will be described later, is reached. Specifically, 0 is displayed as an initial value in the super probability variable state. Then, it is displayed that the numerical value is incremented by 1 each time the hit judgment is repeated (the judgment result is a loss). Then, when the value of the number of times of ST reaches 100, the super probability variable state ends. Note that the initial value may be 100 instead of 0. Thus, when the initial value of the number of STs is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated.

Also, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 5442 is 3, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting port 440 is 1, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450 is 10, and the number of prize balls for the winning to the big prize opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Also, the maximum winning count per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big winning game is set to 10 counts. Also, the maximum winning count per opening of the normal electric accessory 460 in the normal symbol game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the number of jackpot symbols is set to 100 in common in any of the start winnings of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 . Also, the number of small winning symbols is set to 100 in the case of starting winning of the second starting port 440 .

Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b).

As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Also, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is a hit is set to 100/100. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for a relatively long time of 1.5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6(c), distribution of big wins and small wins will be described.

As shown in FIG.6(c), the big hit by the start winning prize of the 1st starting port 5442 is distributed to six types of jackpot contents (jackpot type). Concretely, the big hit due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is divided into 15R probability variable, substantially 10R probability variable, substantially 5R probability variable, 15R normal, substantially 10R normal, and substantially 5R normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winnings of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -1. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -2, real 10R probability variation is set. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -3, real 5R probability variation is set. In addition, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -4. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -5, substantially 10R normal is set. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -6, substantially 5R normal is set.

In addition, the big hit by the starting winning prize of the second starting port 440 is sorted into 6 types of jackpot contents (jackpot types). Specifically, the big hit by the starting prize of the second starting port 440 is sorted into 15R probability variable, real low ball probability variable, special probability variable, 15R normal, real low ball probability normal, and special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winnings of the second starting port 440, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -1. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -2, real ball output small probability variation is set. In addition, special probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -3. In addition, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -4. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -5, the actual ball output small normal is set. In addition, special normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -6.

Further, the small win is divided into two kinds of small win contents (small win types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into double open (1) and double open (2). These small hit contents are set to correspond to special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, corresponding to special figure (2) small hit -1, open twice (1) is set. In addition, 2 times open (2) is set corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -2.

Here, the "number" column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 6(c) indicates the number of big winning symbols or the number of small winning symbols corresponding to each winning content. That is, as described above, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is 100, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, The probabilities (expected values) of each distribution are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the second start port 440, and the probability (expected value) of each distribution is 25%, 15%, 10%, It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set such that the probabilities (expected values) of being distributed are 98% and 2%, respectively, in the case of a small hit.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6(c), special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, The number of times of time saving given after the end of each winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is set. The number of time reductions given after the winning game is completed is set differently according to the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big win determination or the small win determination is performed.

Here, the notation of "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 6(c) indicates that the special symbol game is in the variable probability state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation of "HL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the variable probability state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. In addition, the notation of "LH" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation of "LL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Furthermore, the notation of "during high probability" indicates that during the high probability state in the special symbol game, that is, a maximum of 100 times of time reduction is given.

In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in a non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special figure (1) jackpot -1 or 6 hits , 50 times of time reduction is given. On the other hand, for example, in the case of “LL” as well, when the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 hits, the number of times of shortening time is not given. That is, when the special symbol game is in a non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-saving state, in the case of a big hit due to the start winning of the first start port 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit - 25% in case of 1 + special figure (1) jackpot - 10% in case of 6) 50 times of time saving is given, and the remaining 65% probability of time saving is not given.

Further, in the case of a small hit, after the end of the small win game, in principle, the game state before the small win is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted so as to continue to count from the number of STs related to the hit determination resulting in the small win after the small win game is finished. For example, when the 60th small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the end of the small win game. In this case, the remaining number of times of ST after the end of the small winning game is 40 times. Similarly, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state, the time saving state is resumed after the small win game is finished so as to continue counting from the number of times related to the hit determination of the small win.

As an exception to the above principle, for example, during the ST, if a small hit occurs at the 100th time (which is the final time of the ST), after the small hit game ends, the ST will be in a state of ending (the state before becoming a small hit is not maintained). Similarly, for example, when a small hit occurs at the 100th time during the time saving state of 100 times, the time saving state ends after the small win game ends (the state before the small win is not maintained).

Below, the winning contents (big winning contents and small winning contents) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6(d).

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the jackpot (kind of the jackpot), 15R variable probability, 15R normal, substantially 10R variable probability, substantially 10R normal, substantially 5R probability variable, substantially 5R normal, special probability variable, special normal, actual ball output Low probability variation, real ball output low normal, is provided. In addition, two-time opening (1) and (2) are provided as small win contents (types of small wins).

15R probability variation and 15R normal are jackpots in which the opening seconds of the big winning port 540 per round is set to 27.996 seconds in all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. be. Thus, in the 15R variable probability and the 15R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the upper limit number of game balls is set to be able to win the big winning hole 540 in all rounds.

Substantial 10R probability variation and substantial 10R normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the opening seconds of the big winning port 540 per round in the 1st to 10th rounds of all 15 rounds is 27.996 seconds. This is a big win in which the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per one round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. Thus, in the substantial 10R probability variation and the substantial 10R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is set to be able to win the big prize opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds The game ball is set so as to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 540.例文帳に追加

Substantial 5R probability variation and substantial 5R normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round in the 1st to 5th rounds of all 15 rounds is 27.996 seconds. This is a big win in which the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per one round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 6th to 15th rounds. Thus, in the substantial 5R probability variation and the substantial 5R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is set to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds The game ball is set so as to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 540.例文帳に追加

The special probability variation and special normal are set so that the big winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first round of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started, and the first round The opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 is set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second openings, and the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 is set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. In the 15th round from 1, the opening seconds of the big winning hole 540 per round is set to 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability variation and special normal, when the jackpot game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings in the first round (for example, 1 per opening) It is set so that the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the remaining third opening and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In addition, in the special probability variation and special normal, the interval between opening between the second opening and the third opening in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

Actual low ball probability change and actual low ball output normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the 1st and 2nd rounds out of 15 rounds. 896 seconds, and in the 3rd to 15th rounds, the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, when a big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, in the first and second rounds). , for example, is set to the extent that one game ball wins per opening, and the game ball is almost impossible to win after the third round). In addition, the interval between rounds between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds in the actual ball payout probability variable and the actual ball payout normal.

Twice open (1) and (2) are small wins in which the big winning opening 540 is opened twice for 0.896 seconds each when a small win game is started. That is, the small winning game is to operate the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode. It is set so that it is difficult to win a prize (for example, one ball per opening) in the big prize opening 540 . It should be noted that, in double opening (1), the small winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed for the second time is set to 1.0 seconds. In addition, in double opening (2), the small winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed for the second time is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the number of seconds the big winning opening 540 is opened in the first and second openings of the first round when the type of jackpot is special probability variable and special normal, and when it is a small win (twice open (1) and (2)) are set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings. That is, the opening mode of the big winning opening 540 is the same for the special probability variable and special normal, and the small win (twice open (1) and (2)) until the second opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed. set. In this way, the special variable probability and the special normal jackpot game open and close the big winning port 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small winning opening and closing mode) that looks like a small winning game in the first and second openings of the first round. It is what makes

In the small wins (twice opening (1) and (2)), the winning end intervals after the second big winning opening 540 is opened are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in double opening (1), the winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 for the second time is set to 1.0 seconds. In addition, in double opening (2), the winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 for the second time is set to 5.0 seconds.

Also, the interval between the opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability variable and the special normal and the small winning end interval in the second opening (2) of the small winnings are the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, the opening mode of the special winning prize opening 540 is set to be the same for the special probability variation, the special normal, and the small winning twice opening (2) until the third opening of the special winning prize opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and special normal jackpot games are found to be jackpot games after the third release of the first round. In this way, the special variable probability and the special normal jackpot game are operated in the pseudo small win opening/closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed in a specific opening/closing mode (opening/closing mode after the jackpot is found) in which the jackpot game is found. It is something that makes

Similarly, the number of seconds the big winning opening 540 is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds when the type of the big hit is the actual low ball probability variation and the real low ball probability normal, and when it is a small win (open twice The opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings of (1) and (2) are set to the same 0.896 seconds. That is, the actual low ball probability change, the actual low ball output normal, and the small hit (open twice (1) and (2)) mean that the big winning hole 540 are set to be the same.

In addition, the inter-round interval between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the real low ball probability change and the real low ball normal, and the small hit end interval in the second round (2) of the small hits and are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the actual low ball probability change, the actual low ball output normal, and the opening of the small prize twice (2) mean that the opening mode of the big winning hole 540 is maintained until the third opening of the big winning hole 540 is started. set to be the same. In this way, the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small winning opening and closing mode) that looks like a small winning game in the opening of the first and second rounds of the real small winning ball probability change and the real small winning ball normal jackpot game. is opened and closed.

[Game flow]
The game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game progresses while repeating transitions to appropriate game states at predetermined timings. Here, a corresponding effect mode is set for each of the game states. Various effects are set in the effect mode. That is, when the game is started, the game state is shifted to an appropriate game state, and the effect of the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is performed. In this embodiment, production modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as production modes.

As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in most cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric support) state). Further, when the game is in the normal game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal game state to another game state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 . Exceptionally, for example, if there is suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol when the electric support state ends 100 times, the hit determination of the second special symbol in the normal game state is the maximum number of times of suspension. This is done up to 4 times, and if the judgment results in a big hit, the state will shift to the electric support state, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. It should be noted that although the electric support state has ended in the above 4 times, if a big hit occurs at that time, it is possible to return to the electric support state, so it is a normal game state and the second special symbol A special performance mode different from the performance mode 1 may be used to give the player a feeling of anticipation while the hit determination is being performed.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the big hit determination is performed by starting winning of the first starting port 5442 by so-called left-handed hitting. Also, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is a big hit and the game state shifts to the time saving (electrical sapo) state, so-called right hitting is performed. In this way, while the time saving (electrical sapo) state continues, the big hit determination is performed by the starting winning prize of the second starting port 440. - 特許庁In addition, although the result of the jackpot determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 was a big hit, if the game state did not shift to the time saving (electrical support) state (the game state is a non-time saving (non-electrical support) state ), left-handed batting continues.

When the game state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the production of production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) big hit When it becomes -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probability variable state/time saving (electric support) state. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901, S902). In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S910, S911). That is, the game state after the transition is the same as the game state before the transition. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is set to continue (maximum 100 times) during the variable probability state.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 1 to 3, the game state shifts again to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S912, S911). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of ST and the number of times of shortening of working hours counted until reaching the jackpot are cleared. That is, the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving are counted from 0.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state described later (steps S913, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice ( When it becomes 1) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ST (variable probability state) and the time saving state are terminated, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number of times are cleared. counting is resumed (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. , the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (variable probability state) and the time saving state are terminated, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time reduction (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction are cleared count is restarted (steps S916 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S920, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -1 When it becomes either from 3, the game state shifts to the variable probability state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S922, S911). Further, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -4 When it becomes one of 6 from to, the game state shifts again to the non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state (steps S923, S921). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (open twice (1 ) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S924 and S925; No). That is, the production of the production mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S926 and S925; No). That is, the production of the production mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice ( When it becomes 1) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), while ST (probability change state) continues, the time saving state ends, so the probability change state/non-time saving ( The game state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time reduction (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction are cleared count is restarted (steps S930 and S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) becomes a loss. , the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving state ends, so the probability change state/non-time saving ( The game state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo)) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number of times are cleared. Then, counting is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Thus, when the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, ST (probability variable state) continues, while the time saving (electric sapo) state ends. That is, the player hits left-handed instead of right-handed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect in the effect mode 5 is set to have the same content as the effect in the effect mode 1. Thus, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player enters a game state (latency variable probability state) in which it is difficult to recognize that ST (variable probability state) continues. The effect of the effect mode 5 is the same as the effect of the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability variable state has been determined.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes either -1 or 2, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state (steps S934, S911). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes -3, the game state shifts again to the probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (steps S935, S933). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big win is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes either -4 or 5, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (that is, normal game state) (steps S936, S900). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S937, S951). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a variable probability state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times, ST (variable probability state) ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number, the current game state (probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state) is maintained, the number of ST is not cleared, and the count is It is resumed (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the production of the production mode 5 is continued.

It should be noted that the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggers the effect of the effect mode 5 that is currently being performed. Specifically, when the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 times after the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes ), the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 times (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed has become the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. , the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 times (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950, S951). In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reduction is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes one of -1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S952, S911). In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes either from -4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S953, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice When (1) and (2) are reached, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S954 and S955; No). That is, the production of the production mode 6 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo)) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared. Counting is restarted (steps S956, S955; No).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -2 or 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -4 or -5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970, S900).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the production of production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The normal game state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980, S900).

In such a game flow, when the production mode 2 is started (step S902), the game state shifts to a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state, so that the ST number is set to 100 times. be. Similarly, when the production mode 3 is started (step S911), the ST number is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after the ST is started), for example, if the result of the hit determination is a small hit, (in principle) the current game state is maintained after the small win game ends. , the ST count is not cleared and the count is restarted. Thus, the production of the production mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small winning game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened twice so that one game ball wins per opening. That is, when production mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determinations reaches a predetermined number and the production mode ends (until ST ends) between), the small winning game can be played repeatedly. In this way, when the small winning game is repeated, it is possible to obtain prize balls by the small winning game and increase the number of game balls in the player's hand.

In the following, the ST in which prize balls can be obtained by a small winning game and the number of game balls at the player's hand can be increased is referred to as a super variable state. In addition, a game in which the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased by trying to acquire prize balls through a small winning game after the super-probability state is reached is called a rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per one time) shall continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probable state until the next big hit or the end of the time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, a game in which the time-saving state ends (for example, a game of 100 times or 50 times of hit determination, which will be described later) becomes a rush end condition.

In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, if the production mode 3 is started by any one of the special figures (2) jackpot -1 to 3, the game state before and after the jackpot is also in a super variable state. Therefore, it is assumed that the super-probable variable state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that rushes were performed consecutively (the second rush was performed).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probability state is reached, the obtained balls are displayed. A detailed description of the displayed balls will be given later.

[Description of the operation of the main control circuit]
Processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number counter, the effect condition selection random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 and an opening time timer for the big winning opening 540 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start switch 5472 or the second start switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. processing, etc. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the pass gate switch 49a, and performs processing such as storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processing in steps S13 and S14. , and the normal symbol display unit 71 are stored in the main RAM 103 with a control signal for driving the symbol display unit 71 . The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 and the normal symbol display portion 71 . Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays and stops the special symbols based on the received control signal. In addition, the normal symbol display unit 71 normally displays the symbols in a variable and stationary manner based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (eg, the calling device, the hall computer, etc.). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the big winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (normal electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 allows the game balls to enter various winning ports (specifically, the big winning port 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, 450). It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 101 determines that a game ball has won a prize in any of the winning holes, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the prize to the payout/emission control circuit 300 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the processes from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The system timer interrupt processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the main processing at predetermined intervals even while the main processing is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the big-hit determination random number counter, the big-hit symbol determination random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 operates various switches (specifically, the first starting switch 5472, the second starting switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 451). etc.) (that is, the presence or absence of detection of game balls in various switches). The main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200 when it determines that a game ball has been detected in any of various switches (when a game ball has won in any of various winning holes). . For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) game balls, the main CPU 101 transmits a big winning opening winning command to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs register return processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control process]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described below with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 11, numerical values written beside steps S101 to S108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processes from step S101 to step S108. The numerical values are stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103 .

In step S100, the main CPU 101 loads the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

Note that in steps S101 to S108 described later, the main CPU 101 executes steps corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and depending on the determination result, performs each step at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in the step. As a result, the specific symbol game is progressed. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. In addition to this subroutine, the main CPU 101 also performs system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined intervals.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control status flag when the control status flag is the value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. , and set the waiting time after determination (eg, 600 ms) to the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the processing of step S103 after the post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time has passed after confirmation, the result of the hit determination is a hit (big win or small win). It is determined whether or not. When the result of the win determination is a win, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating win start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the win start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the winning start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs winning start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal for opening the big winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating winning start interval management and the time corresponding to the winning start interval has passed. , to the big winning opening solenoid 620 . As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 540 .

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) as a big winning opening opening time timer. set to That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 increments the counter for the number of openings of the large winning opening when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management for reopening the large winning opening and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning hole is open. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0" is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (it is the final round) is met. If it is the final round, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag, and if it is not the final round, sets a value (05H) indicating waiting time management for reopening the big winning opening. Set the control state flag. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs winning end interval processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval and the time corresponding to the winning end interval has elapsed. Set the status flags. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. The details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to proceed with the special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", and "07H" when the result of the hit determination is loss in a case where the game state is not a big win or a small win game state. By setting them in order, the processes of steps S101, S102, S103, and S108 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at predetermined timings. Further, when the game state is not a big win or a small win game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" when the result of the win determination is a big win or a small win. By setting in order, the process of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing, and control to a big hit or a small hit game state is performed. Further, when the control to the big win or small win game state is performed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H" and "05H" in order, so that step S105 and step S106 shown in FIG. is performed at a predetermined timing to play a big win or a small win game. In addition, when the condition for ending the big win or small win game is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "04H", "06H", and "07H" in order, so that step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of steps S107 and S108 is performed at a predetermined timing, and the big win or small win game is finished.

[Special symbol memory check process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag does not indicate the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is start memory. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If the data (random number value for hit determination) is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is starting memory (more specifically, starting memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 sets a value that permits the execution of the demonstration display as the demonstration display permission value when the state where the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. A demonstration display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, a demonstration display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S115. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If so, the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is changed as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is changed as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 stores each of the data in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. Further, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 stores each of the data in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) to the second special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs big hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values for a big hit (big hit determination values) based on the read high probability flag. do. That is, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, a high probability hit (jackpot) determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, a jackpot determination is performed. A normal hit (jackpot) determination table with a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state), the probability of shifting to the big hit game state is improved than in normal times.

Then, the main CPU 101 extracts at the time of starting winning, and the random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). and the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big win when the hit determination random number value and the big win determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big win (losing) when the hit determination random value and the big win determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to establish a big win game state advantageous to the player (big win determination) in the big win determination process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs small hit determination processing. Incidentally, the small hit determination process is performed when the big hit is not determined in the big hit determination process in step S118. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the preset It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small win when the random value for winning determination and the small winning determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small win (losing) when the random value for winning determination and the small winning determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter the small-hit game state (small-hit determination) in the small-hit determination process.

In this embodiment, as a hit determination table to be referenced with the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area, two types of normal use and high probability use (probability variation use) are prepared, As a hit determination table to be referenced with the hit determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, two types of normal use and high probability use (probability variation) are prepared, and a total of four types of hit determination are prepared. A table is provided. The two types of normal hit determination tables have the same jackpot probability, and the two types of high probability hit determination tables have the same jackpot probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (for probability variation), which is referred to as the hit determination random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. are the same. In addition, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (variable probability), which is referred to as the hit determination random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, is the same. is. In this way, the main CPU 101 is provided with the condition that the game ball has passed through the starting area (the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440). A first winning game state, a second winning game state in which a small amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first winning game state, and a third winning game state in which game balls equivalent to the second winning game state can be obtained. It is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a game state.

It should be noted that the small hit probability due to winning to the first starting port 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hitting probability due to winning to the second starting port 440 . The jackpot probability of winning the first starting port 5442 in the normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning the second starting port 440 .

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, any one of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is determined as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big win pattern when the result of the hit determination is a big win, determines a small win pattern when the result of the hit determination is a small win, and determines neither a big win nor a small win. That is, in the case of losing, a losing pattern is determined. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the hit determination result determined in the process of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines the variable display mode of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the data indicating such variation patterns.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 . As a result, the special symbols are variably displayed in the determined variation pattern in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 . In addition, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereby, by the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the effect display corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern designation command is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

In step S<b>123 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103 . A special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . The sub-control circuit 200 starts an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the variation state number is (01H). When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is not (01H), the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the first special symbol as the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big-hit symbol data and the big-hit symbol command of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 73 . The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the first special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the second special symbol big-hit symbol based on the big-hit symbol determination random number extracted from the big-hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the second special symbol jackpot symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the second special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74 . The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a second special symbol jackpot symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S160. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small winning symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the second special symbol as the small winning symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big winning symbol determining counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small winning symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the second special symbol small winning symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74 . The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a small winning symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. . As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting winning start interval display time data corresponding to winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the winning start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data related to the number of openings of the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data related to the number of openings of the big winning openings in the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the missing symbol and the command of the missing symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and displays the first special symbol display section according to whether the changing special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display part 73 or the second special symbol display part 74 variably displays the special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the missing symbol of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification pattern is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in a display mode in which there is no loss. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it terminates this subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. Symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after determination. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 is demonstrated using FIG.15 and FIG.16.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management processing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big win determination is not a big win, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>303 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag of the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.

In step S<b>306 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S325.

In step S<b>308 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction count flag of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

In step S<b>309 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a time saving end command in the main RAM 103 . The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the time-saving end. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S<b>326 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S310.

In step S<b>328 , the main CPU 101 clears the ST count flag of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

In step S<b>329 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an ST end command in the main RAM 103 . The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S311, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (03H) indicating the winning interval management process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a winning start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the winning start interval time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. In addition, the hit start interval time is also determined for each type of hit, but in the present embodiment, at least special probability variation, special normal, real ball output low probability variation, real ball output low normal and special figure (2) small hit -2 The winning start interval time is set to be the same or to a time (for example, 1 second) that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. A special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S314.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big win start command or a small win start command corresponding to the special symbol. A big-hit start command or a small-hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. A special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management processing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the process proceeds to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

At step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it terminates this subroutine.

In step S<b>403 , the main CPU 101 sets the upper limit value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 .

In step S<b>404 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening/closing pattern for each round or a small win according to the type of the big win symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

In step S<b>406 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this case, the display command during opening of the big winning opening becomes data indicating the first round. The display command during opening of the large winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command during opening of the large winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

In step S<b>408 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

In step S<b>409 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

In step S<b>410 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the big winning opening 540 . The variables stored in this manner drive the large winning opening solenoid 620 to open the large winning opening 540 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Big Winning Gate Reopen Wait Time Management Processing]
Below, the subroutine (large winning opening re-open waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the big winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it terminates this subroutine.

In step S<b>502 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

In step S<b>503 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this case, the display command during the opening of the big winning opening becomes data indicating the second round and the subsequent rounds. The display command data during opening of the big winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . The command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to increase the round counter by one. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating the processing for opening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S<b>506 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S<b>507 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

In step S<b>508 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Grand Prize Opening Processing]
Below, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "10", the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the big winning opening winning counter is not equal to or greater than "10", the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a big winning opening opening/closing process according to the set opening/closing pattern for each round or small win. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of opening and closing the big winning opening 540 according to the opening/closing pattern for each round or for the small win set in step S405. Specifically, a process of opening and closing the big winning opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of waiting for time and closing and opening the big winning opening 540 every round or according to the opening/closing pattern of the small win. I do. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S603.

Here, in this embodiment, the special probability variation, the interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the first round of the special normal, the first opening and the second opening of the special figure (2) small hit -2 The interval time between openings is the same or is set to a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 second). That is, in the process of step S602, special odds, special normal, special figure (2) small hit -2 is "0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 seconds open interval time → 0.896 seconds open will be executed in the order of time. In addition, although it is not processed in this step but set in step S607, the interval time between the rounds of the first and second rounds of the actual low ball probability change and the real low ball output normal is the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), "open time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → 2 rounds of 0.896 seconds eye open time”. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the types of winnings based on the time period during which the big winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time timer is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process moves to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it terminates this subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting big winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read out from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 540 . The variables stored in this manner will cause the grand prize opening solenoid 620 to be in a closed state. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the process proceeds to step S610. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the count value of the number of opening times of the large winning opening is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of opening times of the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the count value of the number of opening times of the big winning prize stored in the main RAM 103 with the upper limit number of opening times of the big winning prize or more. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the upper limit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the opening number of winning openings, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S610. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the opening number of winning openings, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the open time interval display time in the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (05H) indicative of waiting time management for reopening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

In step S<b>609 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the winning end interval display time in the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S<b>612 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a big win end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small win, a small win end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small win end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (hit end interval process) executed in step S107 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the winning end interval is "0". Determine whether or not. If the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S702, and if the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", ends this subroutine.

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 to the control state flag. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S703.

In step S<b>703 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to the big win symbols or small win symbols and the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . Specifically, as the control data, game states such as a normal game state and a variable probability state are set. Also, the main CPU 101 sends an end command to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game ending process) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating special symbol game end processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is shifted to step S711. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
The processing of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and performs various processing such as display processing by the sub-CPU 201 .

[Sub-control main processing]
First, sub-control main processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 upon power-on. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number value stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, random number value for determining effect, random number value for determining jackpot effect, random number value for determining stop symbol, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes commands stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 . The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls effects using the effect button 62 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 generates various data such as identification pattern data, background image data, effect image data, etc. based on the received data. image data is read out from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read out from the image data ROM and displays them in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound/lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the light emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs role product control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation and lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207 . The control of the operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201 includes the control of the operation of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83. is included. When this process is completed, the process moves to the random value update process in step S1102 again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 22 is being performed, there are cases where the sub-control main process is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is performed. Timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the values used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203 . Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs effect button switch input detection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the values saved in step S201 to each register. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 22 is being executed, there are cases where the sub-control main processing is interrupted and command interrupt processing is performed. Command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the values used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 stores the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the values saved in step S1301 to each register. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis processing) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 22 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, the process moves to step S1402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no received command, it ends this subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 reads the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads commands stored in the receive buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special winning opening winning command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the big winning opening winning command, the process moves to step S1404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special winning opening winning command, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the winning number counter and the total winning number counter during the big hit. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of prize balls won by the player by winning the game ball into the big prize opening 540 (the number of winning game balls). It should be noted that the winning number counter and the total winning number counter during the big win start counting (counting) with the start of the big win game as a delimiter. In this way, data on the number of winning balls is obtained each time a big win or a small win is made. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special symbol specifying command, the process moves to step S1406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special symbol specifying command, the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol and the extracted random number for determining effect. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a winning start command (big winning start command, small winning start command). In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a winning start command (big winning starting command, small winning starting command), the process proceeds to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a winning start command (a big winning start command, a small winning start command), the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a jackpot start effect. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is an effect display command during opening of the big winning opening. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the effect display command during opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the effect display command during opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the opening of the big winning opening. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is an inter-round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the inter-round display command, the process proceeds to step S1414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the inter-round display command, the process proceeds to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining effects between rounds. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a winning end display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the winning end display command, the process proceeds to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the winning end display command, the process proceeds to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a time saving end command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the time saving flag and ending the time saving display. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the received other command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Normal electric accessory unit]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32. FIG.

The normal electric accessory unit 400 includes a base member 410 , a front side plate portion 420 , a guideway 430 , a second starting port 440 , a general winning port 450 and a normal electric accessory 460 .

A base member 410 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 as well as FIGS. The base member 410 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape and arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the normal electric accessory unit 400 are attached to the base member 410 .

The front side plate portion 420 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the normal electric accessory unit 400 . The front side plate portion 420 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 420 faces the base member 410 in the front-rear direction and is arranged in a state spaced forward from the base member 410 . In this way, between the front side plate portion 420 and the base member 410, there is formed a gap (hereinafter referred to as "general electric accessory space R1") that allows game balls to enter. In addition, the general electric accessory space R1 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 420 and the base member 410 in a front view. The front side plate portion 420 is attached to the base member 410 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 420 is made of a transparent resin material so that the rear side of the front side plate portion 420 can be visually recognized by the player.

The guiding path 430 shown in FIGS. 27 to 32 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 430 is formed by a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front side plate portion 420 . The taxiways 430 include a first taxiway 431 , a second taxiway 432 , a third taxiway 433 , a fourth taxiway 434 and a fifth taxiway 435 .

The first guideway 431 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the general electric accessory space R1. The first guideway 431 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from right to left while gently inclining. The first guideway 431 is formed in a substantially central portion of the general electrical accessory space R1 in the left-right direction. The left end of the first guideway 431 is formed slightly to the left of the left-right central part of the general electrical accessory space R1. The right end portion of the first guideway 431 is formed slightly to the right of the left-right central portion of the general electrical accessory space R1. The first guiding path 431 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guideway 431 has a deceleration rib 481 .

The deceleration rib 481 serves to reduce the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 431 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 481 is composed of a rear projection 481 a projecting forward from the base member 410 and a front projection 481 b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 420 . A plurality of rear protrusions 481a and front protrusions 481b (in this embodiment, two each) are provided, and are spaced apart from each other along the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the first guideway 431. placed.

With such a configuration of the first guide path 431, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 431) moves while colliding with the rear projection 481a and the front projection 481b, so that the moving speed is reduced. It will happen.

The second guideway 432 is arranged in the vicinity of the lower left end of the general electrical equipment space R1. The second guideway 432 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The second guideway 432 is formed in the left part of the common electrical goods space R1. The left end portion of the second guideway 432 is formed at the left end portion of the universal electric accessory space R1. The right end portion of the second guideway 432 is formed slightly to the left of the left-right central portion of the general electrical accessory space R1. The second guiding path 432 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from right to left.

The third taxiway 433 is arranged substantially above and to the right of the second taxiway 432 in the general electric utility space R1. The third guide path 433 is formed in a substantially curved shape extending while curving from the left to the lower right. The entrance of the third guideway 433 is the upper left end of the third guideway 433 and is formed between the left end of the first guideway 431 and the right end of the second guideway 432 . The entrance of the third guideway 433 is opened toward the upper left. The third guiding path 433 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball downward to the right. The third guideway 433 has a guide portion 482 .

The guide part 482 is formed at the bottom of the third guideway 433 . The guide portion 482 is a substantially triangular plate-like member when viewed from the side. The guide part 482 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 433 backward.

The fourth guideway 434 is arranged at the right end of the common electrical goods space R1. The fourth guideway 434 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the upper right to the lower left while gently sloping. The fourth guideway 434 is formed so as to extend from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the general electric accessory space R1. The fourth guideway 434 is formed to be laterally adjacent to the first guideway 431 . The fourth guiding path 434 thus formed guides the moving game ball to the lower left. The fourth guideway 434 has deceleration ribs 483 .

The deceleration rib 483 serves as deceleration means for decreasing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the fourth guideway 434 . The deceleration rib 483 is composed of one rear projection 483 a projecting forward from the base member 410 and two front projections 483 b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 420 . The rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are each formed in a longitudinal shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the side. Thus, the rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are formed substantially perpendicular to the extension direction of the fourth guideway 434 in a front view. The rear projection 483a and the front projection 483b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in a front view (so as not to face each other in the front-rear direction, but to be displaced in the vertical direction).

With such a configuration of the fourth guideway 434, the game ball (moved by the fourth guideway 434) moves while colliding with the rear projection 483a and the front projection 483b, so that the movement speed is reduced. It will happen.

The fifth taxiway 435 is arranged below the first taxiway 431 in the general electric utility space R1. The fifth guideway 435 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending downward from above. The upper side of the fifth guideway 435 is covered with a wall forming the first guideway 431 . The entrance of the fifth guideway 435 is formed at the upper right end of the fifth guideway 435 (upper end of the left wall forming the fourth guideway 434). The entrance of the fifth taxiway 435 opens to the right (toward the fourth taxiway 434). The fifth guideway 435 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from above to below. The fifth guideway 435 has a guide 484 .

A guide 484 is formed at the bottom of the fifth guideway 435 . The guide 484 is a substantially triangular plate-like member when viewed from the side. The guide 484 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the fifth guideway 435 backward.

The second starting port 440 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The second starting port 440 is formed behind the lowest part of the fifth guideway 435 (behind the guide 484). The second starting port 440 has a second starting port switch 441 . The second starter switch 441 is arranged near the bottom of the fifth guideway 435 (immediately above the fifth guideway 435).

A general winning hole 450 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The general prize winning opening 450 is formed behind the bottom of the third guideway 433 (behind the guide portion 482). The general winning opening 450 includes a general winning opening switch 451 (see FIG. 5).

A normal electric accessory 460 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 and FIGS.

The blade member 461 is a blade-shaped member. The blade member 461 is rotatably supported by the base member 410 and the front side plate portion 420 via a rotation shaft 463 projecting in the front-rear direction. The blade member 461 is arranged at the entrance of the fifth guideway 435 . In this way, the blade member 461 can open and close the entrance of the fifth guideway 435 . When the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth guideway 435 , the tip side of the blade member 461 enters the fourth guideway 434 . Thus, when the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth guideway 435 , part of the game balls guided by the fourth guideway 434 are guided into the fifth guideway 435 .

The starting port solenoid 462 drives the blade member 461 . The starter solenoid 462 is arranged behind the base member 410 . The starting port solenoid 462 is configured to be capable of transmitting driving force to the blade member 461 via a gear (not shown) or the like.

Thus, the normal electric accessory 460 is configured such that the entrance of the fifth guideway 435 can be opened and closed by driving the vane member 461 by the starter solenoid 462 . And when the blade member 461 is opened, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth guideway 434 is guided into the fifth guideway 435, and the passage to the second start port 440 is easy. (open state). Also, when the blade member 461 is closed, the game ball guided by the fourth guideway 434 is not guided into the fifth guideway 435 . That is, it becomes a state (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the second starting port 440 .

In the normal electric accessory unit 400 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is properly guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 430 .
The rolling mode of the game ball in the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be described later.

[Attacker Unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. FIG.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510 , a front side plate portion 520 , a guideway 530 , a large winning opening 540 , a rear side case 550 and a special electric accessory 600 .

A base member 510 shown in FIGS. 33 to 38 , 40 and 41 is a base member of the attacker unit 500 . The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction and its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510 . A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510 .

The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially linear shape extending while gently sloping from right to left in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, a guiding portion 611 of the shutter 610 ), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511 .

A front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 33 to 37 and 39 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500 . The front side plate portion 520 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510 . The front side plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and is arranged in a state spaced forward from the base member 510 . In this way, between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric role space R2") is formed which is large enough for a game ball to enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 520 is made of a transparent resin material, and the rear side of the front side plate portion 520 is visible to the player.

The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 33 and 35 to 41 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed by the shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front side plate portion 520 . The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 , a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533 .

It should be noted that the guideway 530 (more specifically, the first guideway 531) is formed by the shutter 610 as described above. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be movable back and forth with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511 . In such a configuration of the shutter 610 , the first guiding path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510 . Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made on the assumption that the shutter 610 is advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guideway 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end of the special electric role space R2. The first guideway 531 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The length in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the first guide path 531 is slightly shorter than that of the base member 510 . The left end of the first guideway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the special electric role space R2. The right end of the first guideway 531 is formed near the right end of the special electric role space R2. The first guiding path 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guideway 531 has a deceleration rib 534 .

The deceleration rib 534 serves to reduce the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534 a projecting forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front projections 534 b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520 . In this embodiment, six rear projections 534a are provided. Also, five front projections 534b are provided. The plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged along the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the first guideway 531 with appropriate spacing therebetween. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in a front view (so as not to face each other in the front-rear direction, but to be shifted in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first guideway 531, the game ball (which is moved by the first guideway 531) is, as shown in FIGS. While colliding with the ball, it moves in a zigzag shape in plan view (because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), so the movement speed is reduced.

When the moving speed of the game ball moved along the first guide path 531 is reduced in this way, a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531 as shown in FIG. 45(c). situation can be created. Thus, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guideway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guideway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. , and can be made to win a prize in the big prize opening 540.例文帳に追加That is, it is possible to quickly digest the rounds in the jackpot game.
Also, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls stay on the shutter 610, many prizes can be won.
In addition, since many game balls can be won at once, winning more than the number of possible wins in one round of the jackpot game (so-called over-winning) is likely to occur.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric role space R2. The second guideway 532 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from right to left while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second guideway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guideway 531 . In this way, the second guideway 532 and the first guideway 531 are configured as one substantially linear guideway that gently slopes from right to left. The second guideway 532 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from right to left (first guideway 531 side).

The third guideway 533 is arranged substantially in the center of the special electric role space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guideway 533 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The third guideway 533 is arranged below the first guideway 531 . The third guideway 533 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the first guideway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 and the like, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531 . A wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532 . Thus, the third guiding path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third guiding path 533 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (towards the big winning opening 540). The third guiding path 533 has a guide portion 535 .

The guide part 535 is formed at the bottom of the third guideway 533 . The guide portion 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide part 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

37, 38, 40 and 41 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The big winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowest portion of the third guideway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The big winning opening 540 has a count switch 541 . As shown in FIG. 37 , the count switch 541 is arranged behind and below the big winning opening 540 .

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 to 37, 41, 43, and 44 includes various members (shutter 610, big prize opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 43, the rear case 550 is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 that is substantially rectangular in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, the shutter 610, the link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. In addition, a large winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511. As shown in FIG.

The special electric accessory 600 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 to 38, and 40 to 44 includes a shutter 610, a grand winning opening solenoid 620 and a link arm 630.

As shown in FIG. 42( c ), the shutter 610 has a guiding portion 611 , a connecting portion 612 and a rotating shaft 613 .

The guide portion 611 is a member that forms the first guide path 531 . The guiding portion 611 is formed in an elongated, substantially flat plate shape. The guiding portion 611 is arranged with its plate surface directed in the vertical direction and its longitudinal direction directed in the horizontal direction. The length of the guiding portion 611 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the slit 511 formed in the base member 510 . The length in the front-rear direction (see L1 shown in FIG. 45(a)) of the guiding portion 611 (more specifically, the portion of the guiding portion 611 that can enter the special electric role space R2) is the special electric role space It is formed so as to be shorter than the longitudinal length of R2 by a predetermined length (see L2 shown in FIG. 45(a)). That is, even when the guiding portion 611 advances into the special electric role space R2, a gap of a predetermined length is formed between the front end portion of the guiding portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. be. In this embodiment, the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is set to be shorter than the radius of the game ball.

The connection portion 612 is a member that connects the guide portion 611 and a rotation shaft 613, which will be described later. The connecting portion 612 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in a plan view. The connecting portion 612 is formed to extend rearward from the central portion of the guide portion 611 in the left-right direction.

The rotating shaft 613 is a member that receives the transmitted driving force. The rotating shaft 613 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the axial direction directed vertically. The rotating shaft 613 protrudes upward from the vicinity of the rear end of the connecting portion 612 .

In this way, the shutter 610 as a whole is formed in a substantially convex shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction is convex rearward in plan view. The shutter 610 is housed in the rear case 550 with the guiding portion 611 inserted into the slit 511 . As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the shutter 610 is mounted on a mounting portion 551 in the rear case 550 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. In the following description, the position to which the shutter 610 moves (displaces) to the rearmost relative to the mounting portion 551 is referred to as the first position, and the position to which the shutter 610 moves (displaces) to the frontmost relative to the mounting portion 551 is referred to as a first position. The position is called the second position.

The big winning opening solenoid 620 drives the shutter 610 . The big winning opening solenoid 620 is housed in the rear case 550 . More specifically, the big winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged in a space below the placing portion 551 inside the rear case 550 . The big winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged parallel to the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the shutter 610 . As shown in FIG. 42( a ), the big winning opening solenoid 620 includes a coil portion 621 , a case 622 , a plunger 623 , a spring 624 and a transmission portion 625 .

The coil portion 621 is a hollow tubular member around which an electric wire is wound. Coil portion 621 is configured to be energized. In addition, the coil portion 621 is configured to be switchable between an excited state when energized and a non-excited state when energized. When the coil portion 621 is in an excited state, it can generate a magnetic field inside and pull in the plunger 623 .

Case 622 is a member that accommodates coil portion 621 . The case 622 is formed in a substantially hollow box shape with an open upper side. A right side portion of the case 622 is formed with a hole 626 penetrating in the left-right direction.

The plunger 623 is a substantially cylindrical member. The plunger 623 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the left-right direction. One (left) end of the plunger 623 is inserted into the coil portion 621 through a hole 626 of the case 622 . The plunger 623 has a protruding position where the other (right) end is spaced from the coil part 621 and a non-protruding position near the coil part 621 depending on whether the coil part 621 is in an excited state or a non-excited state. Position and are configured to be displaceable. The other side end of the plunger 623 is formed into a flange shape.

The spring 624 is a member that biases the plunger 623 toward the projecting position. The spring 624 is inserted into the plunger 623 and arranged between the case 622 and a transmission section 625 which will be described later. The spring 624 always urges the transmission portion 625 in a direction (rightward) away from the case 622 .

The transmission part 625 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the big winning opening solenoid 620 . The transmission part 625 is formed in a substantially box shape in a plan view. The transmission portion 625 is connected to the plunger 623 via a flange-shaped portion formed at the other (left) end of the plunger 623 . The transmitting portion 625 is formed with an insertion hole 627 penetrating in the vertical direction in the central portion in a plan view. The insertion hole 627 is formed in an elongated shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the front-rear direction in a plan view.

When the coil portion 621 is in a non-excited state, the large winning opening solenoid 620 configured as described above is arranged at the protruding position as the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) is urged rightward by the spring 624. . Further, when the coil portion 621 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) is pulled into the coil portion 621 against the biasing force of the spring 624 (moves leftward). ) in a non-protruding position. Thus, in the big winning opening solenoid 620, when the coil portion 621 is switched between the non-excited state and the excited state, the transmission portion 625 is displaced to generate driving force.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately switches the position of the plunger 623 between the projecting position and the non-projecting position in order to generate driving force. That is, the big winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately displaces the plunger 623 in the horizontal direction in order to generate driving force.

The link arm 630 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the big winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610 . That is, the link arm 630 is a member that constitutes the link mechanism. As shown in FIG. 42(b), the link arm 630 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. A one-side through-hole 631 penetrating vertically is formed in one-side end of the link arm 630 . The one-side through-hole 631 is formed in a substantially elongated hole shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction in a plan view. The link arm 630 has a downwardly projecting other-side rotating shaft 632 formed at the other-side end thereof. Between the through-hole 631 of the link arm 630 and the rotating shaft 632 on the other side, a central rotating shaft 633 is formed that protrudes vertically.

The link arm 630 having such a structure is rotatably supported inside the rear case 550 via a central rotating shaft 633 . In this way, the link arm 630 is configured to be rotatable about the central rotating shaft 633 clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view. Also, the rotating shaft 613 of the shutter 610 is inserted from below into the one-side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 . In addition, the other side rotation shaft 632 of the link arm 630 is inserted from above into an insertion hole 627 formed in the transmission portion 625 of the big winning opening solenoid 620 .

In the special electric accessory 600 having such a configuration, the driving force generated by the big winning opening solenoid 620 can be transmitted to the shutter 610 via the link arm 630 .

Specifically, when the plunger 623 of the big winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. moves to the left. When the plunger 623 moves leftward, the link arm 630 rotates clockwise around the central rotation shaft 633 via the transmission portion 625 . When the link arm 630 rotates clockwise in plan view, the shutter 610 moves rearward from the second position to the first position as shown in FIG.

Thus, when the shutter 610 is retracted rearward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guiding portion 611) is arranged inside the rear case 550 (arranged at the first position). When the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the rear case 550, the first guideway 531 is not formed, so that the game ball can easily enter the third guideway 533 (and thus the big winning opening 540). state.

On the other hand, when the plunger 623 of the big winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. moves to the right. When the plunger 623 moves to the right, the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view around the center rotation shaft 633 via the transmission portion 625 . When the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, the shutter 610 moves forward from the first position to the second position.

In this way, when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guiding portion 611) is arranged in the special electric role space R2 (arranged at the second position). . When the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the special electric role space R2, the first guideway 531 is formed, so that the entry of the game ball to the third guideway 533 (and thus the big winning opening 540) is prevented. become a difficult situation.

In this way, in the special electric accessory 600, the big winning opening solenoid 620 moves in a direction different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves from the first position to the second position (i.e., the front-rear direction) (i.e., in the left-right direction). ) to generate the driving force. Also, the direction of the drive force generated by the big winning opening solenoid 620 (horizontal direction) is converted by the link arm 630 into the direction in which the shutter 610 moves (forward and backward direction).

As a result, the direction in which the big winning opening solenoid 620 is driven is set in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves (front-rear direction), so the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 (more specifically, the portion of the guide portion 611 that can enter the special electric role space R2) is equal to the length of the special electric role space R2. It is formed so as to be shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In this way, the movement distance (that is, the movement distance in the front-rear direction) when the shutter 610 moves between the first position and the second position can be shortened, so that the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, the link arm 630 rotates around the central pivot shaft 633 in a clockwise direction in a plan view or in a plane direction, depending on the switching of the position of the plunger 623 (non-protruding position or protruding position) in the big prize opening solenoid 620 . Rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, for example, the position of the rear end of the link arm 630 is changed according to the switching of the position of the plunger 623 .

Specifically, when the plunger 623 is switched to the projecting position (that is, when the shutter 610 is in the second position), the position of the rear end of the link arm 630 is the central pivot axis of the link arm 630. 633 (see B10 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, for example, when the plunger 623 is switched to the non-protruding position (that is, when the shutter 610 is in the first position), the position of the rear end of the link arm 630 is one side of the link arm 630. It becomes a portion near the through hole 631 (see B20 in FIG. 44).

In such a configuration, the position of the rear end of the big winning opening solenoid 620 (B30 shown in FIGS. 43(b) and 44(b)) is the rear end of the link arm 630 regardless of whether the position of the plunger 623 is switched. It is arranged ahead of the end position (see FIGS. 43(b) and 44(b)). That is, the rear end portion of the big winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged forward (front side) of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 (the rear end portion of the gaming machine). Thus, the attacker unit 500 is formed compact in the depth direction.

At the rear of the attacker unit 500 (more specifically, at the rear of the left portion of the rear case 550), a magnetism detection device 700 is arranged to prevent fraudulent acts using magnets (FIGS. 43 and 43). See Figure 44). Thus, in this embodiment, since the attacker unit 500 is compactly formed in the depth direction, a space for arranging other game components is provided behind the attacker unit 500 .

In the attacker unit 500 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is properly guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 530 .
Note that the rolling mode of the game ball in the attacker unit 500 will be described later.

46 to 51, the rolling mode of game balls in the normal electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail below.

First, with reference to FIG. 46, the mutual arrangement relationship between the normal electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 46 , the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged above the attacker unit 500 . The left end of the second guideway 432 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged to the right of the left end of the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 in the horizontal direction. That is, the game ball guided by the second guide path 432 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 is released from the second guide path 432, and then falls (rolls) to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. can do.

In addition, right ends of the second guideway 532 and the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the extension direction (lower left) of the fourth guideway 434 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 . That is, the game ball guided by the fourth guideway 434 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 is released from the fourth guideway 434, and then the second guideway 532 or the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 You can drop to the right end.

Below, the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described by specifically exemplifying the game ball rolling in the game area 20 .

In FIG. 47, three game balls (game ball Pa1, game ball Pb1 and game ball Pc1) are illustrated as game balls rolling in the game area 20. FIG.
First, below, among the three game balls, the rolling mode of the game ball Pa1 will be described.

The game ball Pa1 falls (rolls) toward the center of the normal electric accessory unit 400 in the horizontal direction. Such a game ball Pa1 falls onto the first guideway 431 of the normal electric accessory unit 400, as shown in FIG. 48(a). The game ball Pa1 that has fallen onto the first guideway 431 is guided (rolled) downward to the left by the first guideway 431 (see game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48(a)).

A game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48( a ) is released to the outside of the normal electric accessory unit 400 after being guided to the lower left by the first guide path 431 . In this way, the game ball Pa2 released to the outside of the normal electric accessory unit 400 either drops downward to the left as it is (see game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47), or collides with the nearest game nail 68 and hits the right side. It rolls downward (see game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47).

In this way, the game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47 is guided to the third guideway 433 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 when rolled downward to the right. Thus, the game ball PA3 guided to the third guideway 433 is guided to the lower right by the third guideway 433 and wins the general winning opening 450 (see game ball PA4 shown in FIG. 48(b)). .

On the other hand, when the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. In this way, the game ball Pa3 guided to the second guideway 432 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the second guideway 432, and is released to the outside of the normal electric accessory unit 400 (FIG. 48). (See game ball Pa4 shown in (b) and FIG. 49).

In this way, the game ball Pa4 released to the outside of the normal electric accessory unit 400 is an attacker when the shutter 610 is arranged at the second position (when the first guide path 531 is formed). It falls on the first guideway 531 of the unit 500 (see game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50(a)). On the other hand, in the attacker unit 500, when the shutter 610 is arranged at the first position (when the first guideway 531 is not formed), on the third guideway 533 of the attacker unit 500 It falls (see game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50(b)).

In this way, the game ball dropped onto the first guideway 431 of the normal electric role product unit 400 passes through the second guidepath 432 of the normal electric role product unit 400 to the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 or the second It can roll to the three guideways 533 , and can win a prize at the big prize opening 540 according to the timing of the movement of the shutter 610 .

Next, the rolling mode of the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 among the three game balls will be described.

A game ball Pb1 and a game ball Pc1 shown in FIG. 47 are falling (rolling) toward the right portion of the normal electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 falling to the right of the normal electric accessory unit 400 enter the fourth guideway 434 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 .

Of the game balls that have entered the fourth guideway 434, the game ball Pb1 that has fallen on the left side of the fourth guideway 434 is normal when the blade member 461 of the electric accessory 460 is opened. It is guided to the fifth guideway 435 by the blade member 461 (see game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48(a)). Thus, the game ball Pb2 guided to the fifth guideway 435 wins the second starting port 440. - 特許庁In addition, the game ball Pb1 falling on the left side of the fourth guideway 434 remains as it is (without being guided to the fifth guideway 435) when the blade member 461 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. It falls inside the fourth guideway 434 (see game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48(b)).

In addition, the game ball Pc1 falling on the right side of the fourth guideway 434 is guided downward to the left by the fourth guideway 434, and is not guided to another guideway. It falls in the guideway 434 (see game ball Pc2 shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 49). In this way, the game ball Pc2 that has fallen inside the fourth guideway 434 falls onto the second guideway 532 of the attacker unit 500 when released to the outside of the normal electric accessory unit 400 . The game ball Pc2 that has fallen onto the second guideway 532 is guided downward to the left by the second guidepath 532 (see game ball Pc3 shown in FIG. 50).

Thus, when the shutter 610 is arranged at the second position (when the first guide path 531 is formed), the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 It is guided to the first guideway 531 via the path 532 . Then, the game ball Pc3 is guided to the lower left by the first guideway 531. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532, when the shutter 610 is arranged in the first position (when the first guide path 531 is not formed), or the first guide When the shutter 610 moves to the second position while being guided by the path 531, it falls onto the third guide path 533 (see game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50(b)).

In this way, the game ball falling in the fourth guideway 434 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 passes through the second guideway 532 of the attacker unit 500 to the first guideway 531 or the third guideway 533. It can roll, and can win a prize in the big prize opening 540 according to the timing of movement of the shutter 610 .

Here, in the present embodiment, the route of the game ball guided to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 is guided through the second guide path 432 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 as described above. a route guided through the second guideway 532 of the attacker unit 500 (hereinafter referred to as a "second route"); is provided.

Thus, since the game ball can be guided to the first guideway 531 (and thus the third guideway 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, more game balls than the case where there is only one route can be made to win the big prize opening 540 in a short period of time. That is, it is possible to win (pass) many game balls to the big winning hole 540 at once without providing a dedicated driving means. As a result, the round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

In addition, since there are two routes for game balls guided to the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500, as shown in FIG. Game balls may collide with each other. In such a case, since the game ball from the first route (see game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 51(a)) falls from above, the game ball from the second route (see FIG. 51(a) (See game ball Pc3 shown) may be hindered from being guided to the lower left. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 51(b), the game ball Pa5 falling from above and the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left collide and move to the upper right of the first guideway 531. (see game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50(b)).

Thus, the second guideway 432 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 is formed at a position where the released game ball can collide with the game ball rolling on the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 . In addition, the second guideway 432 of the normal electric accessory unit 400 causes the released game ball to collide with the game ball rolling on the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500, and rolls on the first guideway 531. The game ball can be temporarily reversed (moved to the upper right).

In this way, when the game ball Pc3 moves to the upper right of the first guideway 531, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guideway 531 can be further reduced, and in turn the first guideway It becomes easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on 531.例文帳に追加That is, since it is easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, it is possible to allow many game balls to win the big prize opening 540 at once without providing a dedicated driving means. can be done. As a result, the round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

Note that the big winning opening 540 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the passing area.
Further, the shutter 610 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the displacement member.
Also, the big winning opening solenoid 620 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
Further, the deceleration rib 534 and the first guideway 531 according to the present embodiment are an embodiment of deceleration means.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a pachislot gaming machine.

Also, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening 540 is illustrated as an example of the passing area, but the passing area is not limited to this.

Also, in the present embodiment, the shutter 610 is exemplified as an example of the displacement member, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the deceleration rib 534 and the first guideway 531 are illustrated as examples of deceleration means, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration different from these.
Below, the first guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53 .

In the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example, the difference from the configuration described above is that the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is It is formed to be longer than the radius and shorter than the diameter.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) and (b), a game ball rolling on the first guideway 531 is positioned between the front end of the guide portion 611 and the rear side of the front side plate portion 520. It rolls on the first guideway 531 in a state in which a part of it is stuck in the gap (a state in which a part of it falls below the upper surface of the guide portion 611). In this way, the game ball can lengthen the flow path. Also, when the game ball rolls on the first guideway 531, it rolls while contacting the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. As shown in FIG. Thus, since the game ball rolls while contacting other members, the moving speed of the game ball can be effectively reduced.

Also, the game ball collides with the front projection 534 b formed on the front plate portion 520 when rolling on the first guideway 531 . In this way, when the game ball rolls beyond the front projection 534b that collides, as shown in FIG. . Here, since a part of the game ball has fallen below the upper surface of the guide portion 611, in order to move in the direction away from the front side plate portion 520, it is necessary to temporarily eliminate the fallen state. There is That is, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the game ball consumes energy to increase the height from the depressed state, and the movement speed is effectively reduced.

By appropriately setting the gap between the front end portion of the guiding portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520, the moving speed of the game ball can be set as desired.

[Configuration of second movable accessory unit 82]
The schematic configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59. FIG.

The second movable accessory unit 82 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The second movable accessory unit 82 mainly comprises a base member 1500 , a first movable body 1600 , a second movable body 1700 and movement control means 1800 .

The base member 1500 is provided with a first movable body 1600 , a second movable body 1700 and movement control means 1800 . The first movable body 1600 is arranged forward of the base member 1500, and the second movable body 1700 is arranged rearward of the base member 1500, respectively. The movement control means 1800 can appropriately move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 with respect to the base member 1500 . Specifically, the movement control means 1800 can move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 to a standby position (see FIG. 54) or a rendering position (see FIG. 69), which will be described later. By moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 at appropriate timing, it is possible to give a visual impression to the player.

The configuration of each member of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 74. FIG.

[Configuration of base member 1500]
A base member 1500 shown in FIGS. 54 to 59 supports each member that constitutes the second movable accessory unit 82 . The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the horizontal direction. Base member 1500 mainly comprises opening 1510 , sliding bar 1520 and arcuate hole 1530 .

The opening 1510 is a portion formed to penetrate the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The openings 1510 are formed in the lower left and right central portions of the base member 1500 . Specifically, the opening 1510 is formed so as to cut out from the lower end portion of the center portion of the base member 1500 in the center portion of the base member 1500 to the approximate center portion of the upper and lower portions. The opening 1510 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

A sliding rod 1520 (see FIG. 56) guides the first movable body 1600 . A pair of left and right sliding rods 1520 are provided at the left and right central portions of the base member 1500 . Sliding rod 1520 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The sliding rod 1520 is arranged with its axial direction directed vertically. The sliding rods 1520 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 1510 when viewed from the front. The sliding rod 1520 (more specifically, the upper end and lower end of the sliding rod 1520) are appropriately fixed to the front side surface of the base member 210. As shown in FIG.

The arc-shaped hole 1530 penetrates the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The arc-shaped holes 1530 are formed near the left and right ends of the base member 1500, respectively. The arcuate hole 1530 is formed in an arcuate shape centering on a rotation shaft 1750 to be described later when viewed from the front.

[Configuration of first movable body 1600]
The first movable body 1600 shown in FIGS. 54, 55, 58, 60 and 61 is supported so as to be vertically movable with respect to the base member 1500, and a part of the first movable body 1600 itself is supported. It can also be moved (rotated). The first movable body 1600 is attached to one surface side (front side) of the base member 1500 and is arranged forward of the base member 1500 . The first movable body 1600 mainly comprises a base member 1610 , a movable body 1620 , movement control means 1630 and a cover member 1640 .

A base member 1610 shown in FIG. 55 supports each member constituting the first movable body 1600 . The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 1610 is arranged in front of the left and right central portions (sliding rods 1520) of the base member 1500. As shown in FIG. Base member 1610 is slidably coupled to slide bar 1520 . Accordingly, the base member 1610 is guided by the sliding rod 1520 so as to be movable along the axial direction of the sliding rod 1520 (that is, the vertical direction). The base member 1610 mainly has a through hole 1611 and a connecting shaft 1612 .

The through hole 1611 penetrates the base member 1610 in the front-rear direction. The through holes 1611 are formed on the right and left sides of the center of the base member 1610 (a pair of left and right).

The connecting shaft 1612 is a substantially cylindrical member. The connecting shaft 1612 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The connecting shafts 1612 are provided at both left and right ends of the base member 1610, respectively. The rear end portion of the connecting shaft 1612 is fixed while being inserted through the right end portion and the left end portion of the base member 1610 .

A movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 54, 60 and 61 is supported so as to be movable (rotatable) with respect to the base member 1610 . A pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are provided with respect to the base member 1610 . The left and right movable bodies 1620 are generally symmetrical. Therefore, the configuration of the right movable body 1620 will be specifically described below, and the description of the configuration of the left movable body 1620 will be omitted as appropriate. The movable body 1620 mainly includes a base member 1621 , a substrate 1622 , a light diffusion member 1623 , a cover member 1624 and a rotating shaft 1625 .

A base member 1621 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 supports each member constituting the first movable body 1600 . The base member 1621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base member 1621 has a longitudinal direction oriented substantially in the left-right direction and a sharp right end. The base member 1621 mainly has a cylindrical portion 1621a and a long hole 1621b.

The cylindrical portion 1621a is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1621 a is formed near the left end of the base member 1621 .

The long hole 1621b penetrates the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The long hole 1621b is formed near the left end of the base member 1621 (immediately to the right of the cylindrical portion 1621a). The long hole 1621b is formed to linearly extend a predetermined distance from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1621a to the right (the right end side of the base member 1610).

A substrate 1622 shown in FIG. 61 is mounted with electronic components (functional components). The substrate 1622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1622 is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1610 and is formed into a shape that generally follows the base member 1610 . A plurality of LEDs 1622a are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 1622 at appropriate intervals. A substrate 1622 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1621 .

The light diffusion member 1623 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1622a. The light diffusing member 1623 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusing member 1623 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1622 . The light diffusing member 1623 is made of a translucent material. Appropriate unevenness is formed on the light diffusion member 1623 so that the light passing through the light diffusion member 1623 is diffused. The light diffusion member 1623 is arranged in front of the substrate 1622 so as to cover the substrate 1622 from the front. The light diffusion member 1623 is fixed to the base member 1621 via the substrate 1622 as appropriate.

The cover member 1624 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1624 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1624 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1621 . The cover member 1624 is made of a translucent material. The cover member 1624 is arranged in front of the base member 1621 and the like so as to cover the base member 1621, the substrate 1622 and the light diffusion member 1623 from the front. Cover member 1624 is fixed to base member 1621 .

The rotating shaft 1625 shown in FIGS. 54 and 60 is a substantially cylindrical member. The rotating shaft 1625 is inserted through the cylindrical portion 1621a of the base member 1621 with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. A rear end portion of the rotating shaft 1625 is fixed while being inserted into a right through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610 . Thus, the base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625 .

The right movable body 1620 configured in this way is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 about a rotation shaft 1625 . Also, when the LED 1622 a mounted on the substrate 1622 is turned on, the light from the LED 322 is diffused by the light diffusion member 1623 and irradiated onto the cover member 1624 . This allows the decoration applied to the cover member 1624 to stand out.

Like the right movable body 1620 , the left movable body 1620 is also rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 via a rotation shaft 1625 . A rotating shaft 1625 that supports the left movable body 1620 is fixed while being inserted into a left through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610 .

The movement control means 1630 shown in FIGS. 57, 59, 60 and 62 controls the movement (rotation) of the movable body 1620. FIG. The movement control means 1630 mainly includes a motor 1631 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1632 .

A motor 1631 shown in FIGS. 57 and 59 is a drive source for moving the movable body 1620 . The motor 1631 is fixed to the bottom of the back surface (rear surface) of the base member 1610 . An output shaft (not shown) of the motor 1631 is provided so as to pass through the base member 1610 in the front-rear direction and protrude forward from the base member 1610 .

A driving force transmission mechanism 1632 shown in FIGS. 60 and 62 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1631 to the movable body 1620 . The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 is appropriately supported on the front surface of the base member 1610 . The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 mainly includes an output gear 1632a, a right first transmission gear 1632b, a right second transmission gear 1632c, a left first transmission gear 1632d, a left second transmission gear 1632e and a left third transmission gear 1632f.

The output gear 1632a extracts the driving force of the motor 1631. FIG. The output gear 1632 a is fixed to the front end of the output shaft of the motor 1631 .

The right first transmission gear 1632b and the right second transmission gear 1632c are arranged side by side in order on the right side of the output gear 1632a. Adjacent ones of the output gear 1632a, the right first transmission gear 1632b and the right second transmission gear 1632c are meshed with each other. A cylindrical transmission shaft portion 1632g that protrudes forward from the right second transmission gear 1632c is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral end portion of the right second transmission gear 1632c. The transmission shaft portion 1632g is inserted through the elongated hole 1621b of the movable body 1620 on the right side.

The left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e and the left third transmission gear 1632f are arranged side by side in order on the left side of the output gear 1632a. Adjacent ones of the output gear 1632a, the left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e and the left third transmission gear 1632f are meshed with each other. A cylindrical transmission shaft portion 1632h projecting forward from the left third transmission gear 1632f is formed near the outer peripheral end portion of the left third transmission gear 1632f. The transmission shaft portion 1632h is inserted through the elongated hole 1621b of the left movable body 1620. As shown in FIG.

A cover member 1640 shown in FIG. 54 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1640 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. Cover member 1640 is arranged in front of movement control means 1630 so as to cover movement control means 1630 from the front. Cover member 1640 is secured to base member 1610 . A portion of the front surface of the cover member 1640 is appropriately decorated.

The first movable body 1600 configured in this way is configured as a single movable body that can be vertically moved by movement control means, which will be described later. The vertical movement of the first movable body 1600 will be detailed later.

Further, the first movable body 1600 can move (rotate) the movable body 1620 by the movement control means 1630 . Specifically, when the motor 1631 is driven to rotate the output gear 1632a clockwise in rear view as shown in FIG. 63, the right second transmission gear 1632c rotates clockwise in rear view through the right first transmission gear 1632b. rotate to When the right second transmission gear 1632c rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632g formed in the right second transmission gear 1632c pushes down the long hole 1621b of the right movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the right movable body 1620 rotates about the rotation shaft 1625 counterclockwise in rear view.

Further, when the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in rear view, the left third transmission gear 1632f rotates counterclockwise in rear view via the left first transmission gear 1632d and left second transmission gear 1632e. When the left third transmission gear 1632f rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632h formed in the left third transmission gear 1632f pushes down the long hole of the left movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the left movable body 1620 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 1625 in a rear view.

When the motor 1631 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1632a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear), the right movable body 1620 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the left movable body 1620 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear. The movable body 1620 can be rotated counterclockwise in rear view.

In this manner, the first movable body 1600 can simultaneously rotate the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 by driving the motor 1631 . Below, the position where the right movable body 1620 is rotated maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the left movable body 1620 is rotated maximum clockwise when viewed from the front (a pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 54 and 60) is referred to as a standby position of the movable body 1620. FIG. In addition, the position where the right movable body 1620 is maximally rotated clockwise when viewed from the front and the left movable body 1620 is maximally rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are both downward ) (see FIGS. 64 and 68) is referred to as an effect position of the movable body 1620 .

[Configuration of second movable body 1700]
The second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 55, 57, 58, 59 and 65 is movably (rotatably) supported with respect to the base member 1500. As shown in FIG. The second movable body 1700 is attached to the other surface side (rear surface side) of the base member 1500 so as to be arranged behind the base member 1500 . A pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are provided with respect to the base member 1500 . The left and right second movable bodies 1700 are formed substantially symmetrically across the left and right center of the base member 1500 . Therefore, the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the right side will be specifically described below, and the description of the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the left side will be omitted as appropriate. The second movable body 1700 mainly includes a base member 1710 , a substrate 1720 , a light diffusion member 1730 , a cover member 1740 and a rotating shaft 1750 .

A base member 1710 shown in FIGS. 57, 59 and 65 supports each member constituting the second movable body 1700 . The base member 1710 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base member 1710 is formed in a laterally long shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 1710 mainly has a cylindrical portion 1711 and an elongated hole 1712 .

The cylindrical portion 1711 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. A cylindrical portion 1711 is formed near the right end of the base member 1710 .

The long hole 1712 penetrates the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The long hole 1712 is formed in the vicinity of the right end of the base member 1710 (right below the cylindrical portion 1711). The long hole 1712 is formed so as to linearly extend a predetermined distance from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1711 toward the lower right side (the lower right end side of the base member 1710).

A board 1720 shown in FIG. 65 is mounted with electronic components (functional components). The substrate 1720 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1720 is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1710 and is formed into a shape that generally follows the base member 1710 . A plurality of LEDs 1721 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 1720 at appropriate intervals. A substrate 1720 is secured to the front surface of the base member 1710 .

The light diffusing member 1730 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1721 . The light diffusing member 1730 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusing member 1730 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1720 . The light diffusing member 1730 is made of a translucent material. Appropriate unevenness is formed on the light diffusion member 1730 so that the light passing through the light diffusion member 1730 is diffused. The light diffusion member 1730 is arranged in front of the substrate 1720 so as to cover the substrate 1720 from the front. A light diffusing member 1730 is fixed to the base member 1710 .

The cover member 1740 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1740 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1740 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1710 . The cover member 1740 is made of a translucent material. The cover member 1740 is arranged in front of the base member 1710 and the like so as to cover the base member 1710, the substrate 1720 and the light diffusion member 1730 from the front. Cover member 1740 is secured to base member 1710 .

A rotating shaft 1750 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 59 is a substantially cylindrical member. The rotating shaft 1750 is inserted through the cylindrical portion 1711 of the base member 1710 with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front portion of the rotating shaft 1750 is inserted through the lower right portion of the base member 1500 . Thus, the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750 .

The right second movable body 1700 configured in this way is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 about the rotation shaft 1750 . Also, when the LED 1721 mounted on the substrate 1720 is turned on, the light from the LED 1721 is diffused by the light diffusion member 1730 and irradiated onto the cover member 1740 . This allows the decoration applied to the cover member 1740 to stand out.

Like the second movable body 1700 on the right side, the second movable body 1700 on the left side is also rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via a rotation shaft 1750 . A rotating shaft 1750 that supports the left second movable body 1700 is inserted through the lower left portion of the base member 1500 .

[Configuration of Movement Control Means 1800]
The movement control means 1800 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 66 controls movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. FIG. The movement control means 1800 is generally formed symmetrically. Therefore, the configuration of the right half (right side) of movement control means 1800 will be specifically described below, and the description of the configuration of the left half (left side) of movement control means 1800 will be omitted as appropriate. The movement control means 1800 mainly includes a motor 1810 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1820. As shown in FIG.

A motor 1810 shown in FIGS. 55 and 66 is a driving source for moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 . Motor 1810 is fixed to the upper right portion of base member 1500 . Motor 1810 is arranged so that its output shaft (not shown) faces rearward.

The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1810 to the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 . Driving force transmission mechanism 1820 is appropriately supported by base member 1500 . The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 mainly includes an output gear 1821 , a first transmission gear 1822 , a second transmission gear 1823 , an arm 1824 , a third transmission gear 1825 and a fourth transmission gear 1826 .

The output gear 1821 (see FIG. 57) extracts the driving force of the motor 1810. As shown in FIG. Output gear 1821 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft of motor 1810 .

The first transmission gear 1822 is arranged substantially to the left of the output gear 1821 and meshes with the output gear 1821 .

The second transmission gear 1823 is arranged substantially below the first transmission gear 1822 and meshes with the first transmission gear 1822 . The second transmission gear 1823 mainly includes a transmission shaft portion 1823a.

The transmission shaft portion 1823a is a substantially cylindrical member. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged at a position (eccentric position) at a predetermined distance from the center of the second transmission gear 1823 when viewed from the front. A rear end portion of the transmission shaft portion 1823 a is fixed while being inserted into the second transmission gear 1823 .

The arm 1824 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. Arm 1824 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed substantially in the horizontal direction. Arm 1824 is arranged immediately in front of second transmission gear 1823 . The arm 1824 mainly includes a rotating shaft 1824a, a first elongated hole 1824b, a second elongated hole 1824c, and a gear portion 1824d.

The rotating shaft 1824a is a substantially cylindrical member. The rotation shaft 1824a is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 1824a is arranged below the motor 1810 when viewed from the front. A rear end portion of the rotating shaft 1824a is fixed while being inserted through the base member 1500 . A front end portion of the rotating shaft 1824a is inserted through one end portion (right end portion) of the arm 1824 . Thus, the arm 1824 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1824a.

The first long hole 1824b penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. A first elongated hole 1824b is formed in the central portion of the arm 1824 in the longitudinal direction. The first elongated hole 1824b is formed to extend linearly for a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824. As shown in FIG. The transmission shaft portion 1823a of the second transmission gear 1823 is inserted through the first elongated hole 1824b.

The second long hole 1824c penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. A second elongated hole 1824c is formed at the other end (left end) of the arm 1824 . The second elongated hole 1824c is formed so as to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824 . The right connecting shaft 1612 of the base member 1610 is inserted through the second elongated hole 1824c.

Gear portion 1824 d is formed at one end (right end) of arm 1824 . The gear portion 1824d is formed so that its teeth are directed substantially downward. The teeth of the gear portion 1824d are arranged in an arc shape centering on the rotation shaft 1824a when viewed from the front.

The third transmission gear 1825 is arranged substantially below the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824 d ) and meshes with the gear portion 1824 d of the arm 1824 .

The fourth transmission gear 1826 is arranged substantially to the right of the third transmission gear 1825 and meshes with the third transmission gear 1825 . The front end portion of the rotation shaft 1750 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side is inserted through the fourth transmission gear 1826 . In this way, the fourth transmission gear 1826 is rotatable about the same axis (rotational shaft 1750) as the second movable body 1700 on the right side. The fourth transmission gear 1826 mainly includes an arm portion 1826a and a connecting shaft 1826b.

The arm portion 1826a is a substantially plate-like portion when the plate surface is oriented in the front-rear direction. The arm portion 1826a is formed to extend downward and to the right from the center (rotating shaft 1750) of the fourth transmission gear 1826 when viewed from the front. A distal end (lower right end) of the arm portion 1826a is formed so as to overlap the arcuate hole 1530 on the right side of the base member 1500 in front view.

The connecting shaft 1826 b connects the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826 a ) and the second movable body 1700 . The connecting shaft 1826b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The connecting shaft 1826b is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front end portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted through the tip portion (lower right end portion) of the arm portion 1826a. A middle portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 1530 of the base member 1500 . The rear end of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted through an elongated hole 1712 formed in the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side.

[Movement of first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700]
The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be moved by the movement control means 1800 configured in this way. Specifically, when the motor 1810 is driven to rotate the output gear 1821 clockwise (see FIG. 57), the second transmission gear 1823 rotates through the first transmission gear 1822 (see FIG. 67). Rotate counterclockwise. When the second transmission gear 1823 rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided in the second transmission gear 1823 pushes down the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824 downward. As a result, the arm 1824 rotates about the rotation shaft 1824a counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

When arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise in front view, base member 1610 of first movable body 1600 is pushed downward via connecting shaft 1612 . This causes the first movable body 1600 to move downward (see FIGS. 67 to 70).

In this way, the rotational force (rotational force) of the second transmission gear 1823 is converted into linear force (vertical direction) by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c). Further, the linear force is transmitted to the first movable body 1600 by the arm 1824 (second long hole 1824c).

Further, when the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824d) rotates counterclockwise in front view, the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates counterclockwise in front view via the third transmission gear 1825 . When the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates, the right second movable body 1700 connected to the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) via the connection shaft 1826b also rotates counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 67). to Figure 70).

By driving the motor 1810 in this manner, the first movable body 1600 can be moved downward and the second movable body 1700 can be rotated counterclockwise in a front view.

When the motor 1810 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1821 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 57)), the first movable body 1600 is moved upward, and at the same time, The second movable body 1700 on the right side can be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

Here, the motor 1631 is provided on the back surface of the first movable body 1600 (base member 1610), but the base member 1500 arranged behind the first movable body 1600 has interference with the motor 1631. An opening 1510 is formed to avoid the Therefore, even if the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, the motor 1631 and the base member 1500 do not come into contact with each other.

In the above description, the operation of the right half of movement control means 1800 has been described, but the operation of the left half is the same. That is, by simultaneously driving the left and right motors 1810, the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, and at the same time, the left and right second movable bodies 1700 are rotated (that is, the right second movable body 1700 is viewed from the front). While rotating clockwise, the second movable body 1700 on the left side can be rotated counterclockwise in a front view).

Below, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is substantially maximally raised) in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum clockwise direction in front view (Figs. 54, 55 and 66 ) is referred to as the standby position of the first movable body 1600 . Also, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is lowered to the maximum) in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 has rotated to the maximum counterclockwise direction in front view (see FIGS. 67 to 70). , are referred to as rendering positions of the first movable body 1600 .

When the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, most of the first movable body 1600 is located behind (hidden) behind the game board 17 and the stage 42, and thus is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. state (see FIG. 3). Also, when the first movable body 1600 is at the performance position, most of the first movable body 1600 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is easily visible to the player.

In addition, the position of the second movable body 1700 in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 is fully rotated clockwise in front view (the right second movable body 1700 is fully rotated clockwise in front view and the left first movable body 1700 is The position where the second movable body 1700 is rotated counterclockwise to the maximum in front view (see FIGS. 54, 55, and 66) is referred to as the standby position of the second movable body 1700. FIG. In addition, the position of the second movable body 1700 in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 is fully rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (the right second movable body 1700 is fully rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the left side is The position at which the second movable body 1700 is rotated maximum clockwise in the front view) (see FIGS. 67 to 70) is referred to as an effect position of the second movable body 1700 .

When the second movable body 1700 is in the standby position, substantially the entire second movable body 1700 is located behind the base member 1500, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the second movable body 1700. Also, when the second movable body 1700 is in the performance position, the second movable body 1700 is positioned substantially entirely below the base member 1500, so that the player can easily see the second movable body 1700.

In addition, the movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 by the movement control means 1800 (the standby position (see FIG. 55) and the rendering position (see FIG. 68) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 movement between) and movement of the movable body 1620 provided in the first movable body 1600 (movement of the movable body 1620 between the standby position (see FIG. 60) and the rendering position (see FIG. 64)) are Each can be performed independently. That is, regardless of the position (standby position or effect position) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the standby position or the effect position. It is possible. 69 and 70 show a state in which the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are at the rendering position, and the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 is at the rendering position.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 59, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the standby position, and the first movable body 1600 is accommodated immediately in front (front side) of the base member 1500. In addition, by accommodating the second movable body 1700 immediately behind (rear surface side) of the base member 1500, the entire second movable accessory unit 82 can be formed compactly. Therefore, when the second movable accessory unit 82 is transported, etc., by storing the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 in the standby position, space can be saved during transportation. .

Also, when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the first movable body 1600 is positioned forward (toward the player) from the base member 1500, and the second movable body 1700 is positioned at the base member 1500. They are respectively arranged behind (inside the pachinko game machine 1). Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance (front-rear direction distance) between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, and even if the second movable accessory unit 82 receives an impact during transportation, etc. , the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed. Especially in this embodiment, when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the base member 1500 is arranged between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. , the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be more effectively suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, even in a state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 have moved to the performance position, the first movable body 1600 is positioned further forward than the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. , and the second movable body 1700 is arranged behind the base member 1500 . In this way, the members (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) movable with respect to the base member 1500 are separately arranged in front and behind the base member 1500, so that the second movable accessory The center of gravity of the entire unit 82 is located at a portion near the base member 1500 (inside the base member or near the base member). Therefore, the moment of inertia generated when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 operate (moves) can be reduced, and the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 swing (vibration, etc.). ) can be suppressed. Thereby, the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are arranged substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the first movable body 1600 interposed therebetween when viewed from the front. For this reason, the center of gravity of the entire second movable role product unit 82 is positioned near the left-right center of the second movable role product unit 82, so that the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1600 can be more effectively moved. Swinging (vibration etc.) of the body 1700 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the motor 1631 of the first movable body 1600 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction (for example, in the opening 1510 of the base member 1500 when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position). (See FIG. 59, etc.). In this way, by arranging the motor 1631, which is a relatively heavy member among the first movable body 1600, at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction, the center of gravity of the second movable accessory unit 82 as a whole can be positioned at the base. Positioning near the member 1500 is facilitated. This makes it possible to more effectively suppress rocking (vibration, etc.) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 .

[Holding of first movable body 1600 by movement control means 1800]
Below, the configuration of the movement control means 1800 for holding the first movable body 1600 at the standby position will be described in detail.

Since the first movable body 1600 always has its own weight (a force that tends to move downward), the movement control means 1800 prevents the first movable body 1600 from unintentionally moving downward. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that it can be held at the standby position). 72 to 74, in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration for holding the first movable body 1600 at the standby position, a part of the movement control means 1800 (the second transmission gear 1823 and the arm 1824) and the first movable body 1800 are shown. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a body 1600. FIG.

72 to 74 below, in order to facilitate understanding of the state of rotation (rotational position) of the second transmission gear 1823, the transmission shaft provided on the second transmission gear 1823 A description will be given focusing on the rotational position of 1823a.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the first movable body 1600 is at the standby position, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise to a predetermined position when viewed from the front. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position A. As shown in FIG. The rotational position A is a position above and to the right of the center (rotational axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 when viewed from the front. In this state, the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with one end (right end) of the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise in front view from the state where the first movable body 1600 is at the standby position (see FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a reaches a certain rotation position. When viewed from the front, the center line L of the first elongated hole 1824b (arm 1824) (straight line connecting the central points in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first elongated hole 1824b) corresponds to the rotational trajectory of the transmission shaft portion 1823a. is tangent to the circle R along The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is called a rotational position B. As shown in FIG. In this state, the first movable body 1600 is located at a position higher than the standby position (the highest position within the movable range of the first movable body 1600).

As shown in FIG. 74, when the second transmission gear 1823 further rotates counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 73, the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the rendering position. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is called a rotational position C. As shown in FIG. The rotational position C is a position substantially below the center (rotational axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 when viewed from the front.

In a state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the range (angular range X) between the rotational position A and the rotational position B, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front so that the first movable Body 1600 will move downwards. When the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned within the angle range X, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, thereby moving the first movable body 1600 upward.

In a state in which the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the range (angle range Y) between the rotational position B and the rotational position C, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in a front view, so that the first movable Body 1600 will move upwards. When the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned within the angle range Y, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, thereby moving the first movable body 1600 downward.

In the movement control means 1800 configured in this manner, the self-weight of the first movable body 1600 constantly applies a force to the arm 1824 to rotate it counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 72, when the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned within the angle range X, when the arm 1824 attempts to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates through the transmission shaft portion 1823a. A force is applied to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. However, when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with the right end of the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824, so the second transmission gear 1823 is It cannot rotate any further. That is, even if the force due to the weight of the first movable body 1600 is applied to the arm 1824, the arm 1824 and the second transmission gear 1823 do not rotate, and the first movable body 1600 is held at the standby position.

In this manner, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in a front view, and when the transmission shaft portion 1823a exceeds the rotational position B (rotational position A), the transmission shaft portion 1823a and the right end of the first elongated hole 1824b are connected to each other. are brought into contact with each other and this state is set as the standby position of the first movable body 1600, the first movable body 1600 can be held so as not to move downward due to its own weight. In this case, since the driving force of the motor 1810 is not required to hold the first movable body 1600, power is not wasted and the life of the motor 1810 is not unnecessarily shortened.

It should be noted that the pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the game machine.
Also, the first movable body 1600 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first movable body.
Also, the second movable body 1700 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the second movable body.
Also, the first movable body 1600 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the movable body.
Further, the motor 1810 according to this embodiment is one embodiment of the driving means.
Further, the second transmission gear 1823 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of a rotating body.
Also, the arm 1824 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the conversion mechanism and the reciprocating motion transmission means.
Also, the first elongated hole 1824b according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of movement restricting means.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, a single first movable body 1600 is attached to one side of the base member 1500, and a pair of second movable bodies 1700 are attached to the other side of the base member 1500. The number of (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) is not limited to this. That is, it is possible to attach a plurality of first movable bodies 1600 to the base member 1500, or to attach a single or three or more second movable bodies 1700 to the base member 1500. FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 1823 is restricted from rotating in the clockwise direction in front view beyond the angle range X by the first elongated hole 1824b formed in the arm 1824 (Fig. 66), the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 may be restricted by other configurations. For example, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 by separately providing a restricting member capable of coming into contact with the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided on the second transmission gear 1823 .

[Wiring configuration]
In the following, the configuration related to the wiring of the movable bodies (the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) will be described.

The movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 each have a substrate (substrate 1622 and substrate 1720) on which LEDs are mounted, and it is necessary to supply power to the substrate via a wiring member. There is However, when assembling the movable body 1620 and the second movable body 1700, the wiring member was not properly connected to the substrate, or the wiring member fell out of the substrate due to the movement of the movable body 1620 and the second movable body 1700. In such a case, problems such as a failure to supply power to the substrate may occur. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment has a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of such troubles. A specific description will be given below.

First, the configuration regarding the wiring of the second movable body 1700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80. FIG. 75 and 76, the illustration of the light diffusion member 1730 and the cover member 1740 is omitted for the sake of convenience. Also, in FIG. 77, illustration of a flat cable 1770, which will be described later, is omitted for the sake of convenience. 77 and 78, illustration of the light diffusion member 1730 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The second movable body 1700 includes a connector 1760 and a flat cable 1770 in addition to the base member 1710, substrate 1720, light diffusion member 1730, cover member 1740 and rotating shaft 1750 described above.

A connector 1760 , shown in FIGS. 75-78, brings power into the substrate 1720 . Connector 1760 is provided on the upper right portion of the front surface of substrate 1720 . The connector 1760 is connected to an LED 1721 provided on the substrate 1720 and can supply power to the LED 1721 . The connector 1760 is arranged such that a connection portion into which a wiring member (in this embodiment, a flat cable 1770 described later) can be inserted and fixed is directed substantially upward in a front view. The connector 1760 is connected to the flat cable 1770 by inserting the flat cable 1770 into the connecting portion.

A flat cable 1770 shown in FIG. 76 and FIGS. 78 to 80 is a member that conducts electric power. The flat cable 1770 is formed in a sheet shape having a width in the width direction (width) shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction. The thickness of the flat cable 1770 is formed sufficiently smaller than the width. The flat cable 1770 is flexible (preferably a flexible flat cable (FFC)). FIG. 80 shows only the vicinity of one end of the flat cable 1770 (the end connected to the connector 1760). The illustration of the part is omitted. The flat cable 1770 mainly includes a power line 1771 , an insulator 1772 and a reinforcing sheet 1773 .

The power line 1771 is a portion through which power is conducted. The power line 1771 is made of a conductor. A plurality of power supply lines 1771 are arranged so as to be aligned substantially parallel to each other. The plurality of power lines 1771 includes power lines 1771 to which different voltages are applied. In this manner, the plurality of power supply lines 1771 can conduct electric power of voltage according to the purpose.

The insulator 1772 covers the power line 1771 . The insulator 1772 is formed in a sheet shape covering substantially the entire power supply line 1771 . The insulator 1772 is formed to expose one end of the power line 1771 from one side.

The reinforcement sheet 1773 reinforces the edge of the insulator 1772 . The reinforcing sheet 1773 is provided on the other side of the insulator 1772 (opposite to the side where the power line 1771 is exposed). The reinforcing sheet 1773 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the other side of the insulator 1772 . The reinforcing sheet 1773 is colored differently from the insulator 1772 . This makes it easier to distinguish between the reinforcing sheet 1773 and the insulator 1772 .

A base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 75 to 79 has an outer edge portion 1713 and a guide portion 1714 in addition to the cylindrical portion 1711 and long hole 1712 described above.

The outer edge portion 1713 is a portion formed (upright) to extend forward from the base member 1710 . Outer edge 1713 is formed generally along the contour of base member 1710 . A concave portion 1713 a is formed in the outer edge portion 1713 .

The recessed portion 1713a is a portion formed by recessing the front end surface of the outer edge portion 1713 toward the rear. A concave portion 1713 a is formed in the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1713 . More specifically, recess 1713a is formed in a portion facing the upper end surface (connection portion) of connector 1760 in front view. The concave portion 1713a is formed so as to have a linear shape along the outer edge portion 1713 when viewed from the front. The recess 1713 a is formed to have a length substantially equal to the width of the flat cable 1770 . The concave portion 1713a is formed to have a substantially arcuate shape when viewed in cross section (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

The guide portion 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 to follow a normal wiring route. The guide portion 1714 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. A pair of guide portions 1714 are provided on the upper right portion of the base member 1710 so as to face each other. A pair of guide portions 1714 are arranged so as to sandwich a recess 1713a therebetween. The interval between the pair of guide portions 1714 is formed to be approximately the same as the width of the flat cable 1770 . Guide portion 1714 is arranged to extend from outer edge portion 1713 toward the inside (connector 1760) of base member 1710 in a front view. The width (height) of the guide portion 1714 in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the outer edge portion 1713 adjacent to the guide portion 1714 . That is, the front end portion of the guide portion 1714 protrudes further forward than the front end portion of the outer edge portion 1713 .

Substrate 1720 includes reference lines 1722 in addition to LEDs 1721 described above.

A reference line 1722 shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 serves as a reference for the position of the flat cable 1770 . Reference lines 1722 are formed by suitable printing on the front surface of substrate 1720 . A reference line 1722 is formed on the front surface of the substrate 1720 substantially above the connector 1760 . The reference line 1722 is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper end surface (connection portion) of the connector 1760 .

The cover member 1740 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 77-79 has an outer edge 1741 .

The outer edge portion 1741 is a portion formed (upright) to extend rearward from the cover member 1740 . Outer edge portion 1741 is formed generally along the contour of cover member 1740 . A convex portion 1741 a is formed on the outer edge portion 1741 .

The convex portion 1741a is a portion formed by projecting the rear end surface of the outer edge portion 1741 rearward. The convex portion 1741 a is formed on the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1741 . More specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a portion facing the concave portion 1713a formed in the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 1741a is formed to have a length substantially equal to the width of the flat cable 1770, similarly to the recess 1713a. The convex portion 1741a is formed to have a substantially arcuate shape in a cross-sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

Here, the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a are formed to have curved surfaces with different shapes in cross-sectional view (see FIG. 79). Specifically, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the concave portion 1713a (can enter into the concave portion 1713a). Further, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, the convex portion 1741a comes closest to the concave portion 1713a at two points (parts D and E in FIG. 79) in a cross-sectional view (in this embodiment, , abutting). The D portion is a portion inside the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741 (horizontal direction in FIG. 79). The E portion is a portion outside the tip of the projection 1741 a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741 .

A method for assembling the second movable body 1700, in particular, a method for accurately connecting the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 will be described below.

When connecting the flat cable 1770 by inserting it into the connector 1760, it is checked whether the flat cable 1770 is correctly connected to the connector 1760 by referring to the reinforcing sheet 1773 of the flat cable 1770 and the reference line 1722 of the substrate 1720. be able to.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, in a state in which the flat cable 1770 is accurately connected to the connector 1760 in advance, the end of the reinforcing sheet 1773 of the flat cable 1770 matches (overlaps) the reference line 1722 in front view. ), the print position of the reference line 1722 is adjusted. Therefore, the worker can perform the work accurately by attaching the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 so that the end of the reinforcing sheet 1773 is aligned with the reference line 1722 .

If the flat cable 1770 is connected to the connector 1760 in an inclined state, the end of the reinforcing sheet 1773 does not match the reference line 1722 as shown in FIG. It turns out that the connection is incorrect.

Also, when flat cable 1770 is correctly connected to connector 1760 , flat cable 1770 is arranged to extend from connector 1760 toward guide portion 1714 . The flat cable 1770 is guided by a pair of guides 1714 . Specifically, the flat cable 1770 is arranged so as to be sandwiched by the guide portions 1714 from both sides in the width direction. Therefore, even if the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, one of the pair of guide portions 1714 abuts against the flat cable 1770, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction is restricted. In this manner, guide portion 1714 guides flat cable 1770 to follow a normal wiring route.

Particularly in this embodiment, the second movable body 1700 moves (rotates) around a rotation shaft 1750 extending in the front-rear direction. That is, second movable body 1700 moves on a plane parallel to the surface of flat cable 1770 . Therefore, force is likely to be applied to the flat cable 1770 in a direction parallel to the surface of the flat cable 1770 (for example, width direction). However, in this embodiment, by arranging the guide portions 1714 on both sides of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction, it is possible to effectively restrict the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction.

Also, the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 guide the flat cable 1770 is formed to be exactly the same as the direction in which the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 . That is, the connection portion of the connector 1760 is arranged on the extension line of the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 extends when viewed from the front. Therefore, if flat cable 1770 is connected to connector 1760 in an inclined state, flat cable 1770 interferes with guide portion 1714 as shown in FIG. It turns out that the connection is incorrect.

Flat cable 1770 may be inserted into connector 1760 after substrate 1720 is fixed to base member 1710 or may be inserted into connector 1760 before substrate 1720 is fixed to base member 1710 . When the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 after the substrate 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 unless the flat cable 1770 is inserted accurately (not tilted). It can be seen that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is incorrect. Further, when the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 before the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710, if the flat cable 1770 is not inserted correctly, the flat cable 1770 may be broken when the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710. Since it interferes with the guide portion 1714, it can be seen at a glance that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is inaccurate.

Also, after flat cable 1770 is accurately inserted into connector 1760, cover member 1740 is fixed to base member 1710 from the front as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the outer edge portion 1713 of the base member 1710 and the outer edge portion 1741 of the cover member 1740 are butted against each other and fixed while being in contact with each other. Thus, the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 form a box-shaped member. A space formed inside the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 accommodates the substrate 1720, the connector 1760, and the vicinity of the tip end (the end on the connector 1760 side) of the flat cable 1770. FIG.

Here, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, as shown in FIG. Flat cable 1770 is sandwiched and fixed. Here, the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a are formed in a substantially arc shape. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a while being bent along the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a.

By clamping and fixing the bent portion of the flat cable 1770 in this manner, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held with respect to the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 . As a result, even if the second movable body 1700 moves, the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from moving with respect to the base member 1710, and the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from coming off the connector 1760. .

Especially in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the flat cable 1770 can be clamped at two locations (part D and part E). Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be held more firmly than when it is clamped at one position. In addition, since the portion (the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a) that sandwiches the flat cable 1770 is formed in a curved surface shape, an excessive load is hardly applied to the flat cable 1770, and damage or disconnection of the flat cable 1770 at the portion is prevented. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the shape of the abutting portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710) for sandwiching the flat cable 1770 is not limited to that shown in FIG. A modified example of the matching portion will be described below with reference to FIG. 83 .

In the modified example (first modified example) shown in FIG. 83( a ), the cover member 1740 is formed with a convex portion 1741 b and the base member 1710 is formed with a concave portion 1713 b. The convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isosceles trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710 is formed to have the same shape (substantially trapezoidal shape) as the convex portion 1741b in a cross-sectional view.

In the abutting portion (the convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched over substantially the entire surfaces of the convex portion 1741b and the concave portion 1713b. This allows the flat cable 1770 to be firmly fixed.

In the modified example (second modified example) shown in FIG. 83(b), a convex portion 1741c is formed in the cover member 1740, and a concave portion 1713c is formed in the base member 1710, respectively. The convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isosceles trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The concave portion 1713c of the base member 1710 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isosceles trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The trapezoidal legs of the convex portion 1741c and the trapezoidal legs of the concave portion 1713c (legs facing each other) are formed to be parallel to each other. The rear base of the trapezoid of the recess 1713c (bottom side of the recess 1713c) is formed to be shorter than the rear base of the trapezoid of the projection 1741c (tip side of the projection 1741c).

At the abutting portion (the convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713c of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the inclined surfaces (trapezoidal legs) of the convex portion 1741c and the concave portion 1713c. can be done. At this time, a gap is formed between the tip of the projection 1741c and the bottom of the recess 1713c. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be gently bent within the gap.

In such a second modification, an excessive load is less likely to be applied to the flat cable 1770 due to the corners of the projections 1741c and the recesses 1713c (vertex portions of the trapezoid), and the occurrence of damage, disconnection, etc. of the flat cable 1770 is suppressed. be able to.

In the modification (third modification) shown in FIG. 83(c), the cover member 1740 is formed with an uneven portion 1741d, and the base member 1710 is formed with an uneven portion 1713d. The uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a wavy shape in a cross-sectional view. The uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710 is formed to have the same shape (wavy shape) as the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 in a cross-sectional view.

In the abutting portion (the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 and the uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched over substantially the entire surface of the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d. This allows the flat cable 1770 to be firmly fixed. In addition, since the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d are formed in a curved surface shape without corners, an excessive load is hardly applied to the flat cable 1770, and the occurrence of damage, disconnection, etc. of the flat cable 1770 can be suppressed. .

Next, a configuration related to wiring of movable body 1620 of first movable body 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG.

The movable body 1620 includes a connector 1626 and a flat cable 1627 in addition to the base member 1621 , substrate 1622 , light diffusion member 1623 , cover member 1624 and rotating shaft 1625 described above.

A connector 1626 , shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, brings power into the board 1622 . A connector 1626 is provided on the upper left portion of the rear surface of the substrate 1622 . The connector 1626 is connected to an LED 1622a provided on the substrate 1622 and can supply power to the LED 1622a. The connector 1626 is arranged such that a connecting portion into which a wiring member (in this embodiment, a flat cable 1627 to be described later) can be inserted and fixed is directed substantially upper left in a rear view. The connector 1626 is connected to the flat cable 1627 by inserting the flat cable 1627 into the connecting portion.

A flat cable 1627 shown in FIG. 85 is a member that conducts power. The flat cable 1627, like the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, includes a power line (not shown), an insulator 1627b and a reinforcing sheet 1627c. Note that the flat cable 1627 has substantially the same configuration as the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The base plate 1622 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 has reference lines 1622b in addition to the LEDs 1622a described above.

The reference line 1622b serves as a reference for the position of the flat cable 1627. FIG. The reference line 1622b is formed by applying appropriate printing to the rear surface of the substrate 1622. FIG. The reference line 1622b is formed on the rear surface of the substrate 1622 substantially above and to the left of the connector 1626. As shown in FIG. The reference line 1622b is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper left end surface (connection portion) of the connector 1626. As shown in FIG.

A base member 1621 of a movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 and 86 has an opening 1621c in addition to the aforementioned cylindrical portion 1621a and long hole 1621b.

An opening 1621c shown in FIG. 86 is a portion formed to penetrate the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. An opening 1621 c is formed in the upper left portion of the base member 1621 . Specifically, the opening 1621c is formed at a position facing the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b provided on the substrate 1622 when the substrate 1622 is attached to the base member 1621 . The opening 1621c is formed in such a size and shape that the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b are sufficiently visible from behind through the opening 1621c. In this embodiment, the opening 1621c is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the connector 1626 when viewed from the rear.

A method for assembling the movable body 1620, in particular, a method for accurately connecting the flat cable 1627 to the connector 1626 will be described below.

When inserting the flat cable 1627 into the connector 1626 for connection, as shown in FIG. You can check if it is connected.

Also, after the flat cable 1627 is accurately inserted into the connector 1626, the board 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621 as shown in FIGS. In this state, connector 1626 is arranged to face opening 1621 c of base member 1621 . As a result, the portion where the flat cable 1627 is inserted into the connector 1626 can be confirmed from behind the base member 1621 through the opening 1621c. Therefore, after the board 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621, it is possible to easily check whether the flat cable 1627 is correctly inserted into the connector 1626 or not.

In the above description, the opening 1621c is provided in the movable body 1620 to make the flat cable 1627 visible (see FIG. 86). 1715) can also be provided. A second movable body 1700 (a modification of the second movable body 1700) having the opening 1715 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the modification of second movable body 1700 shown in FIG.

Further, in the modified example of the second movable body 1700, an opening 1715 is formed in the base member 1710. As shown in FIG. The opening 1715 is a portion formed to penetrate the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. An opening 1715 is formed in the upper right portion of base member 1710 . Specifically, the opening 1715 is formed at a position facing the connector 1760 , the reference line 1722 and the guide portion 1714 provided on the substrate 1720 when the substrate 1720 is attached to the base member 1710 . The opening 1715 is formed in such a size and shape that the connector 1760, the reference line 1722, and the guide portion 1714 are sufficiently visible from behind through the opening 1715. FIG. In this embodiment, the opening 1715 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the connector 1760 in rear view.

In the second movable body 1700 configured in this manner, the portion where the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 and the manner in which it is guided by the guide portion 1714 can be viewed from behind the base member 1710 through the opening portion 1715. can be confirmed. Therefore, even after fixing substrate 1720, cover member 1740, etc. to base member 1710, it is possible to check whether flat cable 1770 is correctly inserted into connector 1760 and whether flat cable 1770 follows a normal wiring route. can be easily verified.

Although FIG. 87 shows a modification in which the opening 1715 is applied to the second movable body 1700, the movable body 1620 may also have a guide portion (a guide portion) similar to that provided in the second movable body 1700. 1714) (see FIG. 81), or a butting portion (protrusion 1741a and recess 1713a) (see FIG. 79).

In addition, LED1721 which concerns on this embodiment is one form of implementation of an electronic component.
Also, the base member 1710 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the direction regulating means.
Also, the base member 1710 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first member.
Also, the cover member 1740 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the second member.
Further, the flat cable 1770 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the wiring member.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, power is supplied to the LED 1721 through the flat cable 1770, but the present invention is not limited to this, and power may be supplied to other electronic components. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide portion 1714 is provided on the base member 1710, but may be provided on other members (for example, the cover member 1740, etc.).

Also, the flat cable 1770 need not always be in contact with the guide portion 1714 . For example, normally (the state in which the second movable body 1700 is not moving), it may simply be arranged so as to pass between the pair of guide portions 1714 without contacting the pair of guide portions 1714 . Even with such a configuration, when the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, it comes into contact with one of the pair of guide portions 1714, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 can be restricted. can.

In addition, in the present embodiment, several shapes of the butted portions sandwiching the flat cable 1770 were exemplified (see FIGS. 79 and 83), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flat cable 1770 is bent. Any shape can be used as long as it can be fixed with

In addition, in this embodiment (for example, the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87), the connector 1760 and the flat cable 1627 provided on the rear surface of the substrate 1720 are arranged behind the substrate 1720 in order to be visible. Although the opening 1715 is provided in the base member 1710, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the connector 1760 is provided on the front surface of the substrate 1720, an opening is appropriately provided in the light diffusion member 1730 and the cover member 1740 arranged in front of the substrate 1720 so that the connector 1760 and the like can be viewed from the front. It is also possible to

In addition, in the present embodiment, the guideline 1622b and the guideline 1722, which serve as guides for the positions of the flat cables 1627 and 1770, are formed by appropriately printing the substrates 1622 and 1720. For example, instead of printing, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which reference members are attached to the substrates 1622 and 1720 .

Also, in the present embodiment, the flat cable 1770 is exemplified as the wiring member, but it is also possible to use various other wiring members.

Also, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a pachislot gaming machine.

Below, the configuration of the effect device 2400 according to the first embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail.

A production device 2400 shown in FIG. 88 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to a player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (drum body 2420 to be described later). As shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, the rendering device 2400 includes a mounting base 2410, a drum body 2420, a light emitting unit 2430 and a drive transmission mechanism 2440.

The mounting base 2410 supports a drum body 2420 and the like, which will be described later. The mounting base 2410 includes a housing member 2411 , a right receiving member 2412 , a left receiving member 2413 and a shaft member 2414 .

The housing member 2411 is for housing the drum body 2420 and the like. The housing member 2411 is formed in a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape with its axial direction oriented in the left-right direction. The housing member 2411 has its bottom surface arranged on the right side, and its left and front portions are open. The housing member 2411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative members and the like of the effect device 2400 .

The right receiving member 2412 is for supporting the right end of the drum body 2420 . The right receiving member 2412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right receiving member 2412 is formed so that its outer diameter is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 2411 . The right receiving member 2412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end) of the housing member 2411 by screws and is housed in the housing member 2411 .

The left receiving member 2413 is for supporting the left end of the drum body 2420 . The left receiving member 2413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction. The left receiving member 2413 is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the housing member 2411 . Further, the left receiving member 2413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 2411 . The left receiving member 2413 is recessed leftward except for a portion of the lower portion of the right side surface thereof. The left receiving member 2413 is fixed at its lower portion to the left end of the housing member 2411 with a screw. The left receiving member 2413 has an outer protrusion 2413a and an inner protrusion 2413b.

The outer protruding portion 2413 a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 2413 . The outer projecting portion 2413a projects rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 2413 . The outer projecting portion 2413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view.

The inner protrusion 2413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 2413a. The inner projecting portion 2413b is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side. In addition, the inner edge portion of the inner protruding portion 2413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed from the side.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the shaft member 2414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member with its axial direction oriented in the horizontal direction. The left end of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the inner projecting portion 2413b. The right end of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 2411 and the right receiving member 2412 . The shaft member 2414 supports a light-emitting unit 2430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 2414a attached to the left and right middle portions thereof.

The drum main body 2420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the drum body 2420 has a base member 2421, a reel seat 2422, a left mounting member 2423 and a right mounting member 2424. As shown in FIGS.

The base member 2421 is for accommodating a reel seat 2422 which will be described later. The base member 2421 is formed in a substantially hollow truncated cone shape with its axial direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 2421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end to the left end. The base member 2421 is formed so that the outer diameter of its right end portion is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodation member 2411 (see FIG. 88). The base member 2421 is closed at its left portion and opened at its right portion. The base member 2421 is made of a transparent resin material so that the inside can be viewed. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the base member 2421 has a first protrusion 2421a, a second protrusion 2421b, a third protrusion 2421c, a through hole 2421d and an engaging hole 2421e.

The first protrusion 2421a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421 . The first protrusion 2421 a is arranged at the left end of the base member 2421 and formed to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 2421 . Thus, the first protrusion 2421a is formed to protrude from the bottom surface of the base member 2421 to the right. The first projecting portion 2421a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view. The first protrusion 2421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the 3 o'clock position in FIG. 94).

The second protrusion 2421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 2421a. The second protrusion 2421b is spaced from the first protrusion 2421a in the circumferential direction of the base member 2421 . The second projection 2421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock in FIG. 94).

The third protrusion 2421c is formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 2421b with the center of the base member 2421 as a reference. The third protrusion 2421c is formed at the lower front portion of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in FIG. 94).

The through hole 2421d is a substantially circular hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 2421 in a side view. The through hole 2421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 2414 can be inserted. The through hole 2421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 in the left-right direction.

The engaging hole 2421 e is a substantially rectangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 2421 . The engagement hole 2421e radially penetrates the base member 2421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) engagement holes 2421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 88, the base member 2421 configured in this manner is attached to the housing member 2411 via the left attachment member 2423 and the like, which will be described later. As a result, the base member 2421 is housed in the housing member 2411 and is configured to be visible to the player from the front. 89, the shaft member 2414 is inserted through the through hole 2421d of the base member 2421. As shown in FIG. The base member 2421 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the shaft member 2414 .

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the reel sheet 2422 is a member having a pattern C printed on its outer peripheral surface. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by causing the player to visually recognize it or not to visually recognize it in the game presentation. In this embodiment, as the pattern C, a plurality of patterns such as a number pattern of "111" and a letter pattern of "HIT" are adopted. Also, the design C is appropriately omitted in the drawings other than the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 92, 93 and 98) in order to make other members easier to see.
The reel seat 2422 is configured by rolling a sheet-like member. The reel seat 2422 is formed such that its outer peripheral shape is approximately the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 2421 . The reel seat 2422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 2421 . The reel sheet 2422 is coated with light-transmitting paint on the portion corresponding to the pattern C of its outer peripheral surface, and is coated with light-impermeable (light-blocking) paint on the other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 2422 is configured to allow light to pass therethrough in the portion where the pattern C is printed, and is configured to not allow light to pass through in the portion where the pattern C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 95, the reel seat 2422 has a first cutout portion 2422a, a second cutout portion 2422b, a third cutout portion 2422c and an overlapping portion 2422d.

A first notch 2422 a is formed at the left rear end of the reel seat 2422 . The first notch 2422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 2422 a corresponds to the first projection 2421 a of the base member 2421 . That is, the first notch 2422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 2421a.

The second notch 2422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 2422a. The second notch 2422b is spaced from the first notch 2422a in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 2422 . A second notch 2422b is formed in the upper front portion of the left end of the reel seat 2422 . The second notch 2422b corresponds to the second protrusion 2421b. That is, the second notch 2422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 2421b.

The third notch 2422c is formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the second notch 2422b with the center of the reel seat 2422 as a reference. A third notch 2422c is formed in the lower front portion of the left end of the reel seat 2422 . The third notch 2422c corresponds to the third protrusion 2421c. That is, the third notch 2422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 2421c.

The clockwise distance L1a in FIG. 95 from the first notch 2422a to the second notch 2422b is the same as the clockwise distance in FIG. 95 from the second notch 2422b to the third notch 2422c. is formed to be longer than the distance L2a of .

The overlapping portion 2422d is a portion (one end and the other end in the circumferential direction) where the reel seats 2422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed from the left end to the right end of the reel seat 2422. As shown in FIG. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. Also, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the first notch portion 2422a, the second notch portion 2422b, and the third notch portion 2422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 2422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel seat 2422. As shown in FIG.

The reel seat 2422 configured in this way is accommodated in the base member 2421 as shown in FIGS. At this time, the first notch 2422a engages with the first protrusion 2421a. Also, the second notch 2422b engages with the second protrusion 2421b. Also, the third notch 2422c engages with the third protrusion 2421c. As described above, the reel seat 2422 is configured such that the pattern C is arranged at a specific position on the base member 2421 and can be rotated integrally with the base member 2421 . Further, the pattern C of the reel sheet 2422 is visible from the outside of the base member 2421 when the reel sheet 2422 is accommodated in the base member 2421 .

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the left mounting member 2423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 2421. As shown in FIGS. The left attachment member 2423 has a recess 2423a and a through hole 2423b.

The recessed portion 2423a is a substantially circular recess formed in the left side surface of the left mounting member 2423 in a side view. The recessed portion 2423a is formed to have an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the outer projecting portion 2413a of the left receiving member 2413 (see FIG. 97).

The through hole 2423b is a hole penetrating through the center of the left mounting member 2423 in the left-right direction. The through-hole 2423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view and having an inner diameter through which the shaft member 2414 can be inserted.

The left mounting member 2423 configured in this manner is fixed to the bottom surface (left end) of the base member 2421 with screws. Thereby, the left attachment member 2423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421 . As shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the left mounting member 2423 is rotatably supported by the left receiving member 2413 by fitting the recess 2423a into the outer projecting portion 2413a of the left receiving member 2413. As shown in FIGS. Further, the shaft member 2414 is inserted through the through hole 2423b of the left mounting member 2423. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the left mounting member 2423 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the shaft member 2414 .

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 , the right attachment member 2424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end of the base member 2421 . The right attachment member 2424 is formed such that the outer diameter of its left end is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end of the base member 2421 . The right attachment member 2424 has a flange portion 2424a and a claw portion 2424b.

The flange portion 2424a is formed in the left-right middle portion of the right attachment member 2424. As shown in FIG. The flange portion 2424a is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421 .

The claw portion 2424b is formed at the left end of the right mounting member 2424. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the claw portion 2424b protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 2424 . A plurality of claw portions 2424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, the three claw portions 2424b are formed at approximately the same interval as the engagement holes 2421e of the base member 2421 in the circumferential direction.

The right mounting member 2424 configured in this manner has its left end inserted into the right end of the base member 2421 , and the tip of the claw portion 2424 b engages with the engagement hole 2421 e of the base member 2421 . Thereby, the right attachment member 2424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421 . Moreover, as shown in FIG. 89, the right mounting member 2424 is supported by the right receiving member 2412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into a recess formed in the right receiving member 2412 .

The light emitting unit 2430 is for emitting light forward. The light emitting unit 2430 is housed in the drum body 2420 . The light emitting unit 2430 comprises a substrate 2431 and an LED2432.

The substrate 2431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape and arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The substrate 2431 is arranged inside the reel seat 2422 . The substrate 2431 is arranged behind the shaft member 2414 and fixed to the shaft member 2414 via the connecting member 2414a. As a result, the substrate 2431 is held by the mounting base 2410 with its plate surface facing forward and backward even when the drum body 2420 rotates (it is configured so as not to rotate integrally with the drum body 2420). ).

The LEDs 2432 are arranged on the bottom left, top (top in the left-right center) and bottom right of the substrate 2431 . The LED 2432 is configured to emit light in the forward direction by lighting.

The drive transmission mechanism 2440 is for transmitting drive force to the drum body 2420 . As shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the drive transmission mechanism 2440 is provided on the left receiving member 2413. As shown in FIGS. The drive transmission mechanism 2440 has a motor 2441 , an upper gear 2442 and a lower gear 2443 .

The motor 2441 is supported above the left receiving member 2413 . The motor 2441 is arranged above the housing member 2411 . A rotating shaft 2441 a of the motor 2441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 2441 .

The upper gear 2442 is an external gear fixed to the rotary shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 via a bush 2442a. The upper gear 2442 is arranged above the left mounting member 2423 .

The lower gear 2443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 2413 . The lower gear 2443 is disposed between the upper gear 2442 and the left mounting member 2423 and meshes with the upper gear 2442 and the left mounting member 2423, respectively.

Next, the operation mode of the rendering device 2400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the effect device 2400, the state in which the player cannot visually recognize the symbol C (the state in which the symbol C is not facing forward) is changed to the state in which the symbol C is visible (the state in which the symbol C is facing forward). , will be described below.

First, the effect device 2400 lights the LED 2432 and drives the motor 2441 . As a result, the power of the motor 2441 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 2441a, the upper gear 2442, the lower gear 2443, and the left mounting member 2423 in this order, and the left mounting member 2423 rotates around its axis in the circumferential direction. Accordingly, the drum body 2420 rotates relative to the mounting base 2410 and the light emitting unit 2430 .

After that, the effect device 2400 stops the motor 2441 . As a result, the effect device 2400 arranges the predetermined pattern C (for example, "111" shown in FIG. 92) printed on the reel sheet 2422 at the front end. As a result, the effect device 2400 displays a predetermined pattern C to the player and allows the light from the LED 2432 to pass through the reel sheet 2422 . In this way, the effect device 2400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined pattern C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 96, the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment has the first notch 2422a to the third notch 2422c and the first protrusion 2421a to the third protrusion 2421c. are engaged. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed for the player from being shifted due to the relative rotation of the reel seat 2422 .

In addition, according to the drum body 2420 according to the present embodiment, relative rotation of the reel seat 2422 can be prevented without using double-sided tape, so the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the assembly work of the drum body 2420 will be described.

First, the left mounting member 2423 is brought into contact with the base member 2421 shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, and the base member 2421 and the left mounting member 2423 are fixed with screws.

Next, the reel seat 2422 is rolled and housed in the base member 2421 . At this time, the reel seat 2422 is rolled so that the ends of the reel seat 2422 in the circumferential direction overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed. Then, the reel seat 2422 is inserted into the base member 2421 so that the first notch 2422a to the third notch 2422c and the first protrusion 2421a to the third protrusion 2421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 96). Thereby, the reel seat 2422 is attached to the base member 2421 . Thus, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c are used as a reference for the attachment position to the base member 2421. As shown in FIG.

After that, the left end portion of the right mounting member 2424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 2421, and the claw portion 2424b of the right mounting member 2424 is engaged with the engagement hole 2421e of the base member 2421. By the above, the assembly work of the drum main body 2420 is completed.

The reel seat 2422 according to this embodiment can be positioned (positioned) in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 2421 with reference to the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c. According to this, compared with the case where the reel seat 2422 is positioned only by one notch, it can be positioned with high accuracy.

Here, if the plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c (and the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c) were arranged at the same intervals in the circumferential direction, the design C would identify the base member 2421 during assembly. may be displaced in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) with respect to the position of . Specifically, when the first notch 2422a is engaged with the second protrusion 2421b, the second notch 2422b is engaged with the third protrusion 2421c, and the third notch 2422c is engaged with the third protrusion 2421c. 1 projection 2421a. In this case, even if all the notches 2422a to 2422c are engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c, the pattern C (reel seat 2422) is displaced by 120° from the specific position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the distance L1a from the first notch 2422a to the second notch 2422b is the distance from the second notch 2422b to the third notch 2422c. is formed so as to be a distance different from the distance L2a to. In this case, if the cutouts corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first cutouts 2422a corresponding to the first protrusions 2421a) are not engaged, all of the cutouts 2422a to 2422c are engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c. 2421c cannot be engaged. For example, when trying to engage the second notch 2422b with the first projection 2421a, the circumferential positions of the other notches 2422a and 2422c are displaced with respect to the other projections 2421b and 2421c. cannot be combined.

In this way, even if the reel seat 2422 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c, all the notches 2422a to 2422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c. can be one. As a result, the reel seat 2422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 2421 simply by engaging the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c with the first projection portion 2421a to the third projection portion 2421c. can be placed with high accuracy. According to this, after the reel seat 2422 is attached to the base member 2421, it is not necessary to adjust the attachment position of the reel seat 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 again.

In addition, since the reel sheet 2422 is only housed in the base member 2421 (not attached with double-sided tape), it can be smoothly housed in the base member 2421 . Also, when changing the orientation of the reel sheet 2422 after it is housed in the base member 2421 , it is not necessary to peel off the double-sided tape, and the reel sheet 2422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 2421 . Therefore, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel seat 2422 to the base member 2421 can be effectively improved.

Further, the reel seat 2422 is only engaged with the first protrusion 2421a to the third protrusion 2421c at the first notch 2422a to the third notch 2422c. Therefore, the reel seat 2422 can be easily taken out simply by pulling it out from the base member 2421 . According to this, it is possible to improve detachability between the base member 2421 and the reel seat 2422, and the base member 2421 and the reel seat 2422 can be easily reused.

Also, the overlapping portion 2422d of the reel sheet 2422 according to this embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, it is possible to make the overlapped portion 2422d inconspicuous, thereby improving the appearance.

The first notch 2422a according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first position specifying means according to the present invention.
Also, the second notch 2422b according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the second position specifying means according to the present invention.
Also, the third notch 2422c according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the position specifying means according to the present invention.
Also, the first protrusion 2421a, the second protrusion 2421b, and the third protrusion 2421c according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, although the type of gaming machine is pachinko in the present embodiment, it is not limited to this, and may be a slot machine or the like.

Also, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this, and may be, for example, two or four or more. good too. However, from the viewpoint of being able to improve the positioning accuracy, it is preferable that the number of protrusions and cutouts is three or more. Further, when the number of protrusions and notches is two, the distance from the first notch to the second notch (clockwise distance in FIG. 95) and the distance from the second notch to the first notch , (the distance in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95) to the cutout portion of .

Also, the locations where the three notches 2422a to 2422c are formed on the reel seat 2422 are not limited to the left end. The three notches 2422a to 2422c may be formed at the right end of the reel seat 2422, for example. In this case, the three cutouts 2422 a - 2422 c may engage the right mounting member 2424 .

In addition, although the three cutouts 2422a to 2422c are respectively formed at the left end of the reel seat 2422 (arranged so as to match their positions in the left-right direction), they are not limited to this. direction may be shifted.

Also, the reel seat 2422 can be configured to engage with the base member 2421 and the right mounting member 2424, respectively. In such a case, the reel seat 2422 is formed with, for example, three notches at its left end and right end. The right mounting member 2424 also has three projections that can engage with the notches on the right side of the reel seat 2422 . With this configuration, relative rotation of the reel seat 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 can be prevented at the left end and right end of the reel seat 2422 . As a result, relative rotation of the reel seat 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel seat 2422 has a plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c, but is not limited to this. good. In this case, the base member 2421 has cutouts that are engageable with a plurality of protrusions.

In addition, although the reel sheet 2422 uses the three cutouts 2422a to 2422c as guides for the mounting position, the guides for the mounting position are not limited to the cutouts, and are printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 2422. It may be a mark of . In this case, the plurality of landmarks will function as position specifying means according to the present invention.

Also, the configuration of the drum body 2420 is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and can be configured like the drum body 2520 according to the modifications shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, for example.

A drum body 2520 according to the modification differs from the drum body 2420 according to the present embodiment in the configurations of a base member 2521 and a left mounting member 2523 . The base member 2521 has an opening 2521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 2421 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the opening 2521f is formed in the rear upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 2521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 2521 in the left-right direction. The opening 2521f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape).

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the left attachment member 2523 has a pressing portion 2523c in addition to the configuration of the left attachment member 2423 according to this embodiment. The pressing portion 2523c is formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 2523. As shown in FIG. The pressing portion 2523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left mounting member 2523. As shown in FIG. The pressing portion 2523c protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left mounting member 2523 . The pressing portion 2523c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape). As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the pressing portion 2523c is inserted through the opening 2521f of the base member 2521. As shown in FIGS. The pressing portion 2523c is arranged radially inward slightly (approximately twice the thickness of the reel seat 2422) from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521. As shown in FIG.

In a modification, when the reel seat 2422 is accommodated in the base member 2521 , the overlapping portion 2422d is arranged between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521 and the pressing portion 2523c of the left mounting member 2523 . The overlapping portion 2422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421 by the pressing portion 2523c.

With this configuration, the overlapping portion 2422d can be held by the pressing portion 2523c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overlapped portion 2422d (the end portion of the reel seat 2422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction and create a gap. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking through the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the aesthetic appearance.

Below, the configuration of the effect device 3400 according to the second embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail.

A production device 3400 shown in FIG. 101 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to a player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (drum body 3420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the production device 3400 includes a mounting base 3410, a drum main body 3420, a light emitting unit 3430 and a drive transmission mechanism 3440.

The mounting base 3410 supports a drum body 3420 and the like, which will be described later. The mounting base 3410 includes a housing member 3411 , a right receiving member 3412 , a left receiving member 3413 and a shaft member 3414 .

The housing member 3411 is for housing the drum body 3420 and the like. The housing member 3411 is formed in a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape with its axial direction oriented in the left-right direction. The housing member 3411 has its bottom surface arranged on the right side, and its left and front portions are open. The housing member 3411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative members of the effect device 3400 and the like.

The right receiving member 3412 is for supporting the right end of the drum body 3420 . The right receiving member 3412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right receiving member 3412 is formed so that its outer diameter is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 3411 . The right receiving member 3412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end) of the housing member 3411 by screws and is housed in the housing member 3411 .

The left receiving member 3413 is for supporting the left end of the drum body 3420 . The left receiving member 3413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left receiving member 3413 is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the housing member 3411 . Further, the left receiving member 3413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 3411 . The left receiving member 3413 is recessed leftward except for a portion of the lower portion of the right side surface thereof. The left receiving member 3413 is fixed at its lower portion to the left end of the housing member 3411 with a screw. The left receiving member 3413 has an outer protrusion 3413a and an inner protrusion 3413b.

The outer protruding portion 3413 a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 3413 . The outer projecting portion 3413a projects rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 3413 . The outer protruding portion 3413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view.

The inner protrusion 3413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 3413a. The inner protruding portion 3413b is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side. In addition, the inner edge portion of the inner protruding portion 3413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed from the side.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the shaft member 3414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member with its axial direction oriented in the horizontal direction. The left end of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the inner projecting portion 3413b. The right end of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 3411 and the right receiving member 3412 . The shaft member 3414 supports a light-emitting unit 3430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 3414a attached to the left and right middle portions thereof.

The drum main body 3420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the drum body 3420 has a base member 3421, a reel seat 3422, a left mounting member 3423 and a right mounting member 3424. As shown in FIG.

The base member 3421 is for accommodating a reel seat 3422 which will be described later. The base member 3421 is formed in a substantially hollow truncated cone shape with its axial direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 3421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end to the left end. The base member 3421 is formed so that the outer diameter of its right end portion is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodation member 3411 (see FIG. 101). The base member 3421 is closed at its left portion and opened at its right portion. The base member 3421 is made of a transparent resin material so that the inside can be viewed. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the base member 3421 has a first protrusion 3421a, a second protrusion 3421b, a third protrusion 3421c, a through hole 3421d and an engaging hole 3421e.

The first protrusion 3421 a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421 . The first protrusion 3421 a is arranged at the left end of the base member 3421 and formed to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 3421 . Thus, the first protrusion 3421a is formed to protrude from the bottom surface of the base member 3421 to the right. The first protruding portion 3421a is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the side. The first protrusion 3421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the 3 o'clock position of the clock in FIG. 107).

The second protrusion 3421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 3421a. The second protrusion 3421b is spaced apart from the first protrusion 3421a in the circumferential direction of the base member 3421 . The second protrusion 3421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock in FIG. 107).

The third protrusion 3421c is formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 3421b with the center of the base member 3421 as a reference. The third protrusion 3421c is formed at the lower front portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in FIG. 107).

The through hole 3421d is a substantially circular hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 3421 in a side view. The through hole 3421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 3414 can be inserted. The through hole 3421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 in the left-right direction.

The engaging hole 3421 e is a substantially rectangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 3421 . The engagement hole 3421e radially penetrates the base member 3421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) engagement holes 3421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 101, the base member 3421 configured in this way is attached to the housing member 3411 via the left attachment member 3423 and the like, which will be described later. As a result, the base member 3421 is housed in the housing member 3411 so that the player can visually recognize it from the front. 102, the shaft member 3414 is inserted through the through hole 3421d of the base member 3421. As shown in FIG. The base member 3421 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the shaft member 3414 .

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the reel sheet 3422 is a member having a pattern C printed on its outer peripheral surface. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by causing the player to visually recognize it or not to visually recognize it in the game presentation. In this embodiment, as the pattern C, a plurality of patterns such as a number pattern of "111" and a letter pattern of "HIT" are adopted. Also, the design C is appropriately omitted in the drawings other than the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 105, 106 and 111) in order to make the other members easier to see.
The reel seat 3422 is configured by rolling a sheet-like member. The reel seat 3422 is formed such that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 3421 . The reel seat 3422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 3421 . The outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 3422 is coated with light-transmitting paint on the portion corresponding to the pattern C, and is coated with light-impermeable (light-blocking) paint on the other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 3422 is configured to allow light to pass therethrough in the portion where the pattern C is printed, and is configured to not allow light to pass through in the portion where the pattern C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 108, the reel seat 3422 has a first cutout portion 3422a, a second cutout portion 3422b, a third cutout portion 3422c and an overlapping portion 3422d.

A first notch 3422 a is formed at the left rear end of the reel seat 3422 . The first notch 3422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 3422 a corresponds to the first projection 3421 a of the base member 3421 . That is, the first notch 3422a is configured to be engageable with the first projection 3421a.

The second notch 3422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 3422a. The second notch 3422b is spaced from the first notch 3422a in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 3422 . A second notch 3422 b is formed in the front upper portion of the left end of the reel seat 3422 . The second notch 3422b corresponds to the second protrusion 3421b. That is, the second notch 3422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 3421b.

The third notch 3422c is formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the second notch 3422b with the center of the reel seat 3422 as a reference. A third notch 3422 c is formed in the lower front portion of the left end of the reel seat 3422 . The third notch 3422c corresponds to the third protrusion 3421c. That is, the third notch 3422c is configured to be engageable with the third projection 3421c.

Such a clockwise distance L1b in FIG. 108 from the first notch 3422a to the second notch 3422b is equal to the clockwise distance in FIG. 108 from the second notch 3422b to the third notch 3422c. is formed to be longer than the distance L2b of .

The overlapping portion 3422d is a portion (one end and the other end in the circumferential direction) where the reel seats 3422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed from the left end to the right end of the reel seat 3422. As shown in FIG. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. Also, the overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the first notch portion 3422a, the second notch portion 3422b, and the third notch portion 3422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 3422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel seat 3422. As shown in FIG.

The reel seat 3422 configured in this way is accommodated in the base member 3421 as shown in FIGS. At this time, the first notch 3422a engages with the first protrusion 3421a. Also, the second notch 3422b engages with the second protrusion 3421b. Also, the third notch 3422c engages with the third protrusion 3421c. As described above, the reel seat 3422 is configured such that the pattern C is arranged at a specific position on the base member 3421 and can be rotated integrally with the base member 3421 . Further, the pattern C of the reel sheet 3422 is visible from the outside of the base member 3421 when the reel sheet 3422 is accommodated in the base member 3421 .

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the left mounting member 3423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 3421. As shown in FIGS. The left attachment member 3423 has a recess 3423a and a through hole 3423b.

The recessed portion 3423a is a substantially circular recess formed in the left side surface of the left mounting member 3423 in a side view. The recess 3423a is formed to have an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the outer projecting portion 3413a of the left receiving member 3413 (see FIG. 110).

The through hole 3423b is a hole penetrating through the center of the left attachment member 3423 in the left-right direction. The through-hole 3423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view and having an inner diameter through which the shaft member 3414 can be inserted.

The left mounting member 3423 configured in this manner is fixed to the bottom surface (left end) of the base member 3421 with screws. Thereby, the left attachment member 3423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421 . As shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the left mounting member 3423 is supported by the left receiving member 3413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 3423a to the outer projecting portion 3413a of the left receiving member 3413. As shown in FIGS. In addition, the shaft member 3414 is inserted through the through hole 3423b of the left mounting member 3423. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the left mounting member 3423 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the shaft member 3414 .

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the right attachment member 3424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end of the base member 3421 . The right attachment member 3424 is formed such that the outer diameter of its left end is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end of the base member 3421 . The right attachment member 3424 has a flange portion 3424a and a claw portion 3424b.

The flange portion 3424a is formed in the left-right middle portion of the right attachment member 3424. As shown in FIG. The flange portion 3424a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421 .

The claw portion 3424b is formed at the left end of the right mounting member 3424. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the claw portion 3424b protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 3424 . A plurality of claw portions 3424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 3424b are formed at approximately the same intervals as the circumferential intervals of the engagement holes 3421e of the base member 3421. As shown in FIG.

The right mounting member 3424 configured in this way has its left end inserted into the right end of the base member 3421 , and the tip of the claw portion 3424 b engages with the engagement hole 3421 e of the base member 3421 . Thereby, the right attachment member 3424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421 . Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the right mounting member 3424 is supported by the right receiving member 3412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into a recess formed in the right receiving member 3412 .

The light emitting unit 3430 is for emitting light forward. The light emitting unit 3430 is housed in the drum body 3420 . The light emitting unit 3430 comprises a substrate 3431 and an LED3432.

The substrate 3431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape and arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The substrate 3431 is arranged inside the reel seat 3422 . The substrate 3431 is arranged behind the shaft member 3414 and fixed to the shaft member 3414 via a connecting member 3414a. As a result, the substrate 3431 is held by the mounting base 3410 with its plate surface facing forward and backward even when the drum body 3420 rotates (it is configured so as not to rotate integrally with the drum body 3420). ).

The LEDs 3432 are arranged on the bottom left, top (top in the left-right center) and bottom right of the substrate 3431 . The LED 3432 is configured to emit light in the forward direction by lighting.

The drive transmission mechanism 3440 is for transmitting drive force to the drum body 3420 . As shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the drive transmission mechanism 3440 is provided on the left receiving member 3413. As shown in FIGS. The drive transmission mechanism 3440 has a motor 3441 , an upper gear 3442 and a lower gear 3443 .

The motor 3441 is supported above the left receiving member 3413 . The motor 3441 is arranged above the housing member 3411 . A rotating shaft 3441 a of the motor 3441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 3441 .

The upper gear 3442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 via a bush 3442a. The upper gear 3442 is arranged above the left mounting member 3423 .

The lower gear 3443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 3413 . The lower gear 3443 is disposed between the upper gear 3442 and the left mounting member 3423 and meshes with the upper gear 3442 and the left mounting member 3423, respectively.

Next, an operation mode of the effect device 3400 will be described. As an example of the operating mode of the effect device 3400, the state in which the player cannot visually recognize the symbol C (the state in which the symbol C is not facing forward) is changed to the state in which the symbol C is visible (the state in which the symbol C is facing forward). , will be described below.

First, the effect device 3400 lights the LED 3432 and drives the motor 3441 . As a result, the power of the motor 3441 is transmitted to the rotating shaft 3441a, the upper gear 3442, the lower gear 3443, and the left mounting member 3423 in this order, and the left mounting member 3423 rotates in the circumferential direction about its axis. Thereby, the drum body 3420 rotates relative to the mounting base 3410 and the light emitting unit 3430 .

After that, the effect device 3400 stops the motor 3441 . As a result, the effect device 3400 arranges the predetermined pattern C (for example, "111" shown in FIG. 105) printed on the reel sheet 3422 at the front end. As a result, the effect device 3400 displays a predetermined pattern C to the player and allows the light from the LED 3432 to pass through the reel sheet 3422 . In this way, the effect device 3400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined pattern C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 109, the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment has a first notch 3422a to a third notch 3422c and a first protrusion 3421a to a third protrusion 3421c. are engaged. This can prevent the reel seat 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed for the player from shifting due to the relative rotation of the reel seat 3422 .

Further, according to the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment, relative rotation of the reel seat 3422 can be prevented without using double-sided tape, so the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the assembly work of the drum body 3420 will be described.

First, the reel seat 3422 shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 is rolled up and accommodated in the base member 3421 . At this time, the reel seat 3422 is rolled so that the ends of the reel seat 3422 in the circumferential direction overlap in the radial direction. As a result, an overlapping portion 3422d is formed. Then, the reel seat 3422 is inserted into the base member 3421 so that the first cutout portion 3422a to the third cutout portion 3422c and the first projection portion 3421a to the third projection portion 3421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 109). Thereby, the reel seat 3422 is attached to the base member 3421 . Thus, in the present embodiment, the first notch portion 3422a to the third notch portion 3422c are used as a reference for the attachment position to the base member 3421. As shown in FIG.

Next, the left mounting member 3423 is brought into contact with the base member 3421, and the base member 3421 and the left mounting member 3423 are fixed with screws.

After that, the left end portion of the right mounting member 3424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 3421 , and the claw portions 3424 b of the right mounting member 3424 are engaged with the engagement holes 3421 e of the base member 3421 . By the above, the assembly work of the drum main body 3420 is completed.

The reel seat 3422 according to this embodiment can be positioned (positioned) in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 3421 with reference to the plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c. According to this, compared with the case where the reel seat 3422 is positioned only by one notch, it can be positioned with high precision.

Here, if the plurality of cutouts 3422a to 3422c (and the plurality of projections 3421a to 3421c) are arranged at the same intervals in the circumferential direction, the design C may identify the base member 3421 during assembly. may be displaced in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) with respect to the position of . Specifically, when the first notch 3422a is engaged with the second protrusion 3421b, the second notch 3422b engages with the third protrusion 3421c and the third notch 3422c is engaged with the third protrusion 3421c. 1 projection 3421a. In this case, even if all the notches 3422a to 3422c are engaged with all the projections 3421a to 3421c, the pattern C (reel seat 3422) is displaced by 120° from the specific position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the distance L1b from the first notch 3422a to the second notch 3422b is the distance from the second notch 3422b to the third notch 3422c. is formed so as to be a distance different from the distance L2b to. In this case, if the cutouts corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first cutouts 3422a corresponding to the first protrusions 3421a) are not engaged, all of the cutouts 3422a to 3422c are engaged with all the protrusions 3421a to 3421c. 3421c cannot be engaged. For example, when trying to engage the second notch 3422b with the first projection 3421a, the positions of the other notches 3422a and 3422c in the circumferential direction are displaced from the other projections 3421b and 3421c. cannot be combined.

In this way, even if the reel seat 3422 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c, all the notches 3422a to 3422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 3421a to 3421c. can be one. As a result, the reel seat 3422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 3421 simply by engaging the first notch portion 3422a to the third notch portion 3422c with the first projection portion 3421a to the third projection portion 3421c. can be placed with high accuracy. According to this, after the reel seat 3422 is attached to the base member 3421 , it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel seat 3422 with respect to the base member 3421 .

In addition, since the reel sheet 3422 is only housed in the base member 3421 (not attached with double-sided tape), it can be smoothly housed in the base member 3421 . Moreover, even when changing the direction of the reel sheet 3422 after it is accommodated in the base member 3421 , it is not necessary to peel off the double-sided tape, and the reel sheet 3422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 3421 . Therefore, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel seat 3422 to the base member 3421 can be effectively improved.

Further, the reel seat 3422 is only engaged with the first projections 3421a to the third projections 3421a through the third projections 3421c at the first cutouts 3422a through the third cutouts 3422c. Therefore, the reel seat 3422 can be easily taken out simply by pulling it out from the base member 3421 . According to this, it is possible to improve detachability between the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422, and the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422 can be easily reused.

Also, the overlapping portion 3422d of the reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, it is possible to make the overlapped portion 3422d inconspicuous, so that the appearance can be improved.

The three protrusions 3421a to 3421c according to this embodiment are one embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.
Also, the three notches 3422a to 3422c according to the present embodiment are an embodiment of the reel seat engaging portion according to the present invention.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, although the type of gaming machine is pachinko in the present embodiment, it is not limited to this, and may be a slot machine or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this, and may be, for example, one or four or more. good too. However, from the viewpoint of being able to improve the positioning accuracy, it is preferable that the number of protrusions and cutouts is three or more.

Also, the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c and the three notches 3422a to 3422c may be arranged at the same intervals in the rotation direction of the drum body 3420. FIG.

Also, the locations where the three notches 3422a to 3422c are formed on the reel seat 3422 are not limited to the left end. The three notches 3422a to 3422c may be formed at the right end of the reel seat 3422, for example. In this case, the three projections 3421a to 3421c are formed on the right side of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421. As shown in FIG.

In addition, although the three cutouts 3422a to 3422c are respectively formed at the left end of the reel seat 3422 (arranged so as to match the positions in the left-right direction), the present invention is not limited to this. direction may be shifted.

Also, the reel seat 3422 can be configured to engage with the base member 3421 and the right mounting member 3424 respectively. In such a case, the reel seat 3422 is formed with, for example, three notches at its left end and right end. Also, the right mounting member 3424 has three projections that can be engaged with the notches on the right side of the reel seat 3422 . With this configuration, relative rotation of the reel seat 3422 with respect to the base member 3421 can be prevented at the left end and right end of the reel seat 3422 . As a result, relative rotation of the reel seat 3422 with respect to the base member 3421 can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reel seat 3422 has a plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c, but is not limited to this. good. In this case, the base member 3421 has cutouts that are engageable with a plurality of projections.

Moreover, although the base member 3421 is made entirely of a transparent resin material, it is not limited to this. The base member 3421 is sufficient as long as the pattern C can be visually recognized from the outside. That is, the base member 3421 may have at least a portion of its outer peripheral surface transparent. Specifically, the base member 3421 may have, for example, a half of the outer peripheral surface formed of a transparent resin material.

Also, the configuration of the drum body 3420 is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the configuration of the drum body 3520 according to the modification shown in FIGS.

A drum body 3520 according to the modification differs from the drum body 3420 according to the present embodiment in the configurations of a base member 3521 and a left mounting member 3523 . The base member 3521 has an opening 3521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 3421 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the opening 3521f is formed in the rear upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 3521 in the left-right direction. The opening 3521f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape).

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the left attachment member 3523 includes a pressing portion 3523c in addition to the configuration of the left attachment member 3423 according to this embodiment. The pressing portion 3523c is formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 3523. As shown in FIG. The holding portion 3523 c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left mounting member 3523 . The pressing portion 3523c protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left mounting member 3523 . The pressing portion 3523c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape). As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the pressing portion 3523c is inserted through the opening 3521f of the base member 3521. As shown in FIGS. The pressing portion 3523c is arranged slightly radially inward of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 (approximately twice the thickness of the reel seat 3422).

In a modification, when the reel seat 3422 is accommodated in the base member 3521 , the overlapping portion 3422d is arranged between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 and the pressing portion 3523c of the left mounting member 3523 . The overlapping portion 3422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421 by the pressing portion 3523c.

With this configuration, the overlapping portion 3422d can be held by the pressing portion 3523c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overlapped portion 3422d (the end portion of the reel seat 3422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction and create a gap. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking through the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the aesthetic appearance.

Below, the configuration of the effect device 4400 according to the third embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail.

A production device 4400 shown in FIG. 114 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to a player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (drum body 4420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the rendering device 4400 includes a mounting base 4410, a drum body 4420, a light emitting unit 4430 and a drive transmission mechanism 4440.

The mounting base 4410 supports a drum body 4420 and the like, which will be described later. The mounting base 4410 includes a housing member 4411 , a right receiving member 4412 , a left receiving member 4413 and a shaft member 4414 .

The housing member 4411 is for housing the drum body 4420 and the like. The housing member 4411 is formed in a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape with its axial direction oriented in the left-right direction. The housing member 4411 has its bottom surface arranged on the right side, and its left and front portions are open. The housing member 4411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative members and the like of the effect device 4400 .

The right receiving member 4412 is for supporting the right end of the drum body 4420 . The right receiving member 4412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right receiving member 4412 is formed to have an outer diameter large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 4411 . The right receiving member 4412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end) of the housing member 4411 by screws and is housed in the housing member 4411 .

The left receiving member 4413 is for supporting the left end of the drum body 4420 . The left receiving member 4413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction. The left receiving member 4413 is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the housing member 4411 . Further, the left receiving member 4413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 4411 . The left receiving member 4413 is recessed leftward except for a part of the lower part of the right side surface. The left receiving member 4413 is fixed at its lower portion to the left end of the housing member 4411 with a screw. The left receiving member 4413 has an outer protrusion 4413a and an inner protrusion 4413b.

The outer protruding portion 4413 a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 4413 . The outer projecting portion 4413a projects rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 4413 . The outer projecting portion 4413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view.

The inner protrusion 4413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 4413a. The inner projecting portion 4413b is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side. In addition, the inner edge portion of the inner protruding portion 4413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed from the side.

As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the shaft member 4414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member with its axial direction oriented in the horizontal direction. The left end of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the inner projecting portion 4413b. The right end of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 4411 and the right receiving member 4412 . The shaft member 4414 supports a light emitting unit 4430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 4414a attached to the left and right middle portions thereof.

The drum main body 4420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 to 119, the drum body 4420 has a base member 4421, a reel seat 4422, a left mounting member 4423 and a right mounting member 4424. As shown in FIGS.

The base member 4421 is for accommodating a reel seat 4422 which will be described later. The base member 4421 is formed in a substantially hollow truncated cone shape with its axial direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 4421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end to the left end. The base member 4421 is formed so that the outer diameter of its right end portion is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodation member 4411 (see FIG. 114). The base member 4421 is closed at its left portion and opened at its right portion. The base member 4421 is made of a transparent resin material so that the inside can be viewed. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the base member 4421 has a first protrusion 4421a, a second protrusion 4421b, a third protrusion 4421c, a through hole 4421d, an engaging hole 4421e and an opening 4421f. do.

The first protrusion 4421 a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 . The first protrusion 4421 a is arranged at the left end of the base member 4421 and formed to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 4421 . Thus, the first protrusion 4421a is formed to protrude from the bottom surface of the base member 4421 to the right. The first protruding portion 4421a is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the side. The first protrusion 4421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (at the 3 o'clock position in FIG. 120).

The second protrusion 4421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 4421a. The second protrusion 4421b is spaced from the first protrusion 4421a in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421 . The second protrusion 4421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock in FIG. 120).

The third protrusion 4421c is formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 4421b with the center of the base member 4421 as a reference. The third protrusion 4421c is formed at the lower front portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in FIG. 120).

The through hole 4421d is a substantially circular hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in a side view. The through hole 4421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 4414 can be inserted. The through hole 4421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction.

The engaging hole 4421 e is a substantially rectangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 4421 . The engagement hole 4421e radially penetrates the base member 4421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) engagement holes 4421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The opening 4421f is a hole formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421 . The opening 4421f is formed at the rear upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 . The opening 4421f penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction. The opening 4421f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape) (see FIG. 124).

As shown in FIG. 114, the base member 4421 configured in this manner is attached to the housing member 4411 via the left attachment member 4423 and the like, which will be described later. As a result, the base member 4421 is housed in the housing member 4411 and is configured to be visible to the player from the front. 115, the shaft member 4414 is inserted through the through hole 4421d of the base member 4421. As shown in FIG. The base member 4421 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the shaft member 4414 .

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the reel sheet 4422 is a member having a pattern C printed on its outer peripheral surface. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by causing the player to visually recognize it or not to visually recognize it in the game presentation. In this embodiment, as the pattern C, a plurality of patterns such as a number pattern of "111" and a letter pattern of "HIT" are adopted. Also, the design C is appropriately omitted in the drawings other than the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 118 and 119) in order to make the other members easier to see.
The reel seat 4422 is configured by rolling a sheet-like member. The reel seat 4422 is formed such that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 4421 . The reel seat 4422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 4421 . The reel sheet 4422 is coated with light-transmitting paint on the portion corresponding to the pattern C of its outer peripheral surface, and is coated with light-impermeable (light-blocking) paint on the other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 4422 is configured to allow light to pass through the portion printed with the pattern C, and to prevent light from passing through the portion where the pattern C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 121, the reel seat 4422 has a first cutout portion 4422a, a second cutout portion 4422b, a third cutout portion 4422c and an overlapping portion 4422d.

The first notch 4422 a is formed at the left rear end of the reel seat 4422 . The first notch 4422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 4422a corresponds to the first projection 4421a of the base member 4421 . That is, the first notch 4422a is configured to be engageable with the first projection 4421a.

The second notch 4422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 4422a. The second notch 4422b is spaced from the first notch 4422a in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 4422 . A second notch 4422b is formed in the upper front portion of the left end of the reel seat 4422 . The second notch 4422b corresponds to the second protrusion 4421b. That is, the second notch 4422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 4421b.

The third notch 4422c is formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the second notch 4422b with the center of the reel seat 4422 as a reference. A third notch 4422c is formed in the lower front portion of the left end of the reel seat 4422 . The third notch 4422c corresponds to the third protrusion 4421c. That is, the third notch 4422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 4421c.

The clockwise distance L1c in FIG. 121 from the first notch 4422a to the second notch 4422b is equal to the clockwise distance L1c in FIG. 121 from the second notch 4422b to the third notch 4422c. is formed to be longer than the distance L2c of .

The overlapping portion 4422d is a portion (one end and the other end in the circumferential direction) where the reel seats 4422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel seat 4422 . The overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. Also, the overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 4422a, the second cutout portion 4422b, and the third cutout portion 4422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 4422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel seat 4422. As shown in FIG.

The reel seat 4422 configured in this way is housed in the base member 4421 as shown in FIGS. At this time, the first notch 4422a engages with the first protrusion 4421a. Also, the second notch 4422b engages with the second protrusion 4421b. Also, the third notch 4422c engages with the third protrusion 4421c. As described above, the reel seat 4422 is configured such that the pattern C is arranged at a specific position on the base member 4421 and can be rotated integrally with the base member 4421 . Further, the pattern C of the reel sheet 4422 is visible from the outside of the base member 4421 when the reel sheet 4422 is accommodated in the base member 4421 .

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the left mounting member 4423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 4421. As shown in FIGS. The left attachment member 4423 has a recess 4423a, a through hole 4423b and a pressing portion 4423c.

The recessed portion 4423a is a substantially circular recess formed in the left side surface of the left mounting member 4423 in a side view. The recess 4423a is formed to have an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the outer projecting portion 4413a of the left receiving member 4413 (see FIG. 123).

The through hole 4423b is a hole penetrating through the center of the left mounting member 4423 in the left-right direction. The through-hole 4423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view and having an inner diameter through which the shaft member 4414 can be inserted.

The pressing portion 4423c protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left mounting member 4423 . The pressing portion 4423 c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left mounting member 4423 . The holding portion 4423c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 4423 (having a substantially arc shape in a side view). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape) (see FIG. 124). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so as to be able to be inserted through the opening 4421f of the base member 4421 .

The left mounting member 4423 configured in this manner is fixed to the bottom surface (left end) of the base member 4421 with screws. Thereby, the left attachment member 4423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421 . As shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the left mounting member 4423 is rotatably supported by the left receiving member 4413 by fitting the recess 4423a to the outer projecting portion 4413a of the left receiving member 4413. As shown in FIGS. In addition, the shaft member 4414 is inserted through the through hole 4423b of the left mounting member 4423. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the left mounting member 4423 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the shaft member 4414 .

122 and 124, the pressing portion 4423c is inserted through the opening 4421f of the base member 4421. As shown in FIGS. The pressing portion 4423c is arranged radially inward of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 slightly (approximately twice the thickness of the reel seat 4422). The pressing portion 4423 c is arranged radially inward of the overlapping portion 4422 d and presses the overlapping portion 4422 d against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 . As a result, the holding portion 4423c holds the overlapping portion 4422d in a posture along the circumferential direction of the reel seat 4422 .

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the right attachment member 4424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end of the base member 4421 . The right attachment member 4424 is formed such that the outer diameter of its left end is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end of the base member 4421 . The right mounting member 4424 has a flange portion 4424a and a claw portion 4424b.

The flange portion 4424a is formed in the left-right middle portion of the right attachment member 4424. As shown in FIG. The flange portion 4424a is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421 .

The claw portion 4424b is formed at the left end of the right mounting member 4424. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the claw portion 4424b protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 4424 . A plurality of claw portions 4424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 4424b are formed at approximately the same interval as the circumferential interval of the engaging holes 4421e of the base member 4421. As shown in FIG.

The right mounting member 4424 configured in this way has its left end inserted into the right end of the base member 4421 , and the tip of the claw portion 4424 b engages with the engagement hole 4421 e of the base member 4421 . Thereby, the right mounting member 4424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421 . Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the right mounting member 4424 is supported by the right receiving member 4412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into a recess formed in the right receiving member 4412 .

The light emitting unit 4430 is for emitting light forward. The light emitting unit 4430 is housed in the drum body 4420 . The light emitting unit 4430 comprises a substrate 4431 and an LED4432.

The substrate 4431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape and arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The substrate 4431 is arranged inside the reel seat 4422 . The substrate 4431 is arranged behind the shaft member 4414 and fixed to the shaft member 4414 via the connecting member 4414a. As a result, the substrate 4431 is held by the mounting base 4410 with its plate surface facing forward and backward even when the drum body 4420 rotates (it is configured so as not to rotate integrally with the drum body 4420). ).

The LEDs 4432 are arranged on the bottom left, top (top in the left-right center) and bottom right of the substrate 4431 . The LED 4432 is configured to emit light in the forward direction by lighting.

The drive transmission mechanism 4440 is for transmitting drive force to the drum body 4420 . As shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the drive transmission mechanism 4440 is provided on the left receiving member 4413. As shown in FIGS. The drive transmission mechanism 4440 has a motor 4441 , an upper gear 4442 and a lower gear 4443 .

The motor 4441 is supported above the left receiving member 4413 . The motor 4441 is arranged above the housing member 4411 . A rotating shaft 4441 a of the motor 4441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 4441 .

The upper gear 4442 is an external gear fixed to the rotary shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 via a bush 4442a. The upper gear 4442 is arranged above the left mounting member 4423 .

The lower gear 4443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 4413 . The lower gear 4443 is disposed between the upper gear 4442 and the left mounting member 4423 and meshes with the upper gear 4442 and the left mounting member 4423, respectively.

Next, an operation mode of the effect device 4400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the effect device 4400, the state in which the player cannot visually recognize the symbol C (the state in which the symbol C is not facing forward) is changed to the state in which the symbol C is visible (the state in which the symbol C is facing forward). , will be described below.

First, the effect device 4400 lights the LED 4432 and drives the motor 4441 . As a result, the power of the motor 4441 is transmitted to the rotating shaft 4441a, the upper gear 4442, the lower gear 4443, and the left mounting member 4423 in this order, and the left mounting member 4423 rotates in the circumferential direction about its axis. Thereby, the drum body 4420 rotates relative to the mounting base 4410 and the light emitting unit 4430 .

After that, the effect device 4400 stops the motor 4441 . As a result, the effect device 4400 arranges the predetermined pattern C (for example, "111" shown in FIG. 118) printed on the reel sheet 4422 at the front end. As a result, the effect device 4400 displays a predetermined pattern C to the player and allows the light from the LED 4432 to pass through the reel sheet 4422 . In this way, the effect device 4400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined pattern C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 122, the drum main body 4420 according to this embodiment has the first notch 4422a to the third notch 4422c and the first protrusion 4421a to the third protrusion 4421c. are engaged. This can prevent the reel seat 4422 from rotating relative to the base member 4421 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed for the player from shifting due to the relative rotation of the reel seat 4422 .

Next, the assembly work of the drum main body 4420 will be described.

First, the reel seat 4422 shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 is rolled up and accommodated in the base member 4421 . At this time, the reel seat 4422 is rolled so that the ends of the reel seat 4422 in the circumferential direction overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, the overlapping portion 4422d is formed. Then, the reel seat 4422 is inserted into the base member 4421 so that the first notch 4422a to the third notch 4422c and the first protrusion 4421a to the third protrusion 4421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 122). Thereby, the reel seat 4422 is attached to the base member 4421 . Thus, in the present embodiment, the first notch portion 4422a to the third notch portion 4422c are used as a reference for the attachment position to the base member 4421. As shown in FIG.

Next, the left mounting member 4423 is brought into contact with the base member 4421, and the base member 4421 and the left mounting member 4423 are fixed with screws. At this time, the holding portion 4423c is inserted through the opening portion 4421f of the base member 4421 . At this time, the pressing portion 4423c enters the inside of the base member 4421 with the overlapping portion 4422d interposed between it and the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 in the radial direction. When the base member 4421 and the left mounting member 4423 are thus fixed, the pressing portion 4423c presses the overlapping portion 4422d against the inner peripheral surface (outside in the radial direction) of the base member 4421 inside the base member 4421. becomes.

After that, the left end portion of the right mounting member 4424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 4421 , and the claw portion 4424 b of the right mounting member 4424 is engaged with the engagement hole 4421 e of the base member 4421 . By the above, the assembly work of the drum main body 4420 is completed.

Since the drum main body 4420 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the reel seat 4422 is accommodated in the base member 4421, the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 can restrict the opening of the reel seat 4422 due to its elasticity. can. According to this, the reel sheet 4422 can be held in a rolled state without sticking the reel sheet 4422 to the base member 4421 with double-sided tape. This eliminates the need for double-sided tape when attaching the reel seat 4422 to the base member 4421 , and allows the reel seat 4422 to be smoothly housed in the base member 4421 . Further, the reel seat 4422 can be easily taken out from the base member 4421 by simply pulling it out from the base member 4421 . According to this, it is possible to improve detachability between the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422, and the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422 can be easily reused. Also, the manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

Further, the reel seat 4422 according to the present embodiment suppresses deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d by the holding portion 4423c. Specifically, when the left mounting member 4423 without the pressing portion 4423c shown in FIG. 4422d is not fixed, the end in the circumferential direction (more specifically, the end in the radial direction) may be deformed so as to warp radially inward. As a result, a gap S may be formed. In this case, since the light of the LED 4432 leaks through the gap S, the gap S may be conspicuous and the aesthetic appearance may be impaired.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, in this embodiment, the overlapped portion 4422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 by the pressing portion 4423c. According to this, the overlapped portion 4422d can be held in a predetermined posture (deformation can be suppressed). As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the end portion of the reel seat 4422 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance.

Also, the overlapping portion 4422d of the reel sheet 4422 according to this embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, it is possible to make the overlapped portion 4422d inconspicuous, so that the beauty can be improved.

Further, the reel seat 4422 according to the present embodiment can be positioned (positioned) in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 4421 with reference to the plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c. According to this, it is possible to position the reel seat 4422 with high accuracy as compared with the case where the reel seat 4422 is positioned only by one notch.

Here, if the plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c (and the plurality of projections 4421a to 4421c) were arranged at the same intervals in the circumferential direction, the design C would identify the base member 4421 during assembly. may be displaced in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) with respect to the position of . Specifically, when the first notch 4422a is engaged with the second protrusion 4421b, the second notch 4422b engages with the third protrusion 4421c and the third notch 4422c is engaged with the third protrusion 4421c. 1 projection 4421a. In this case, even if all the notches 4422a to 4422c are engaged with all the projections 4421a to 4421c, the pattern C (reel seat 4422) is displaced by 120° from the specific position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the distance L1c from the first notch 4422a to the second notch 4422b is the distance from the second notch 4422b to the third notch 4422c. is formed so as to be a distance different from the distance L2c to. In this case, if the cutouts corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first cutouts 4422a corresponding to the first protrusions 4421a) are not engaged, all of the cutouts 4422a to 4422c are engaged with all the protrusions 4421a to 4422c. 4421c cannot be engaged. For example, when trying to engage the second notch 4422b with the first projection 4421a, the positions of the other notches 4422a and 4422c in the circumferential direction are displaced from the other projections 4421b and 4421c. cannot be combined.

In this way, even if the reel seat 4422 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c, all the notches 4422a to 4422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 4421a to 4421c. can be one. As a result, the reel seat 4422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 4421 simply by engaging the first notch portion 4422a to the third notch portion 4422c with the first projection portion 4421a to the third projection portion 4421c. can be placed with high accuracy. According to this, after the reel seat 4422 is attached to the base member 4421, it is not necessary to adjust the attachment position of the reel seat 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 again.

Note that the pressing portion 4423c according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the pressing member according to the present invention.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, although the type of gaming machine is pachinko in the present embodiment, it is not limited to this, and may be a slot machine or the like.

In addition, although the reel seat 4422 is configured such that the circumferential ends of the reel seat 4422 overlap each other in the radial direction, the present invention is not limited to this. The reel seat 4422 is not limited to only the end portion, and at least a portion of the reel seat 4422 may overlap in the radial direction. Also, in the present embodiment, the entire end portion of the reel seat 4422 (from the left end to the right end in the circumferential direction) overlaps, but only a portion of the end portion may overlap. The state in which the ends of the reel seat 4422 overlap as described above is also included in "partial overlap of the ends of the reel seat".

Also, although the holding portion 4423c is formed on the left mounting member 4423, the member on which the holding portion 4423c is formed is not limited to the left mounting member 4423. FIG. The pressing portion 4423c may be formed on the base member 4421 or the right attachment member 4424, for example. Further, the pressing portion 4423c may be configured by a predetermined member (a member different from the left mounting member 4423) fixed to the opening 4421f of the base member 4421.

Also, the pressing portion 4423c can be configured to press the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d. In such a case, the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left mounting member 4423 and the right mounting member 4424, for example. By configuring in this way, the overlapping portion 4422d can be pressed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d. As a result, deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d can be reliably prevented. Note that the right attachment member 4424 may press the overlapping portion 4422d with the claw portion 4424b. In this case, the claw portion 4424b functions as a pressing member.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this, and may be, for example, one or four or more. good too. However, from the viewpoint of being able to improve the positioning accuracy, it is preferable that the number of protrusions and cutouts is three or more.

Also, the three protrusions 4421a to 4421c and the three cutouts 4422a to 4422c may be arranged at the same intervals in the rotation direction of the drum body 4420. FIG.

In addition, although the three cutouts 4422a to 4422c are respectively formed at the left end of the reel seat 4422 (arranged so as to match their positions in the left-right direction), the present invention is not limited to this. direction may be shifted.

Also, the reel seat 4422 can be configured to engage with the base member 4421 and the right mounting member 4424 respectively. In such a case, the reel seat 4422 is formed with, for example, three notches at its left end and right end. Also, the right mounting member 4424 has three projections that can engage with the notches on the right side of the reel seat 4422 . With this configuration, relative rotation of the reel seat 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 can be prevented at the left end and right end of the reel seat 4422 . As a result, relative rotation of the reel seat 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reel seat 4422 has a plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c, but is not limited to this. good. In this case, the base member 4421 has cutouts that are engageable with a plurality of projections.

In addition, although the reel sheet 4422 uses the three cutouts 4422a to 4422c as guides for the attachment position, the guides for the attachment position are not limited to the cutouts, and are printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 4422. It may be a mark of .

Moreover, although the base member 4421 is made entirely of a transparent resin material, it is not limited to this. The base member 4421 is sufficient as long as the pattern C can be visually recognized from the outside. That is, at least a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 4421 should be transparent. Specifically, the base member 4421 may have, for example, a half of the outer peripheral surface formed of a transparent resin material.

Next, the overall configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 will be described.

The game ball distribution device 5400 distributes the game balls A (see FIG. 131) to a plurality of passages. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410 , a rotation distribution mechanism 5420 , a plate member 5430 , a crew member 5440 , a guide member 5450 , a pressing member 5460 and a sensor group 5470 .

The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A inside the game ball sorting device 5400 . The base member 5410 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side surface. A right portion of the base member 5410 protrudes upward more than other portions. The base member 5410 has an inlet 5411 , an introduction path 5412 , a left guide path 5413 , a right guide path 5414 , an installation space 5415 and an opening 5416 .

The inflow port 5411 is a hole (entrance) for allowing the game ball A to enter. The inlet 5411 is formed in the upper right end (projecting portion) of the base member 5410 . The inflow port 5411 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The inflow port 5411 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The inlet 5411 is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . The inflow port 5411 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from above.

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the lead-in path 5412 is a path for guiding the game ball A entering the inflow port 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed to extend downward from the inlet 5411 .

The left guide path 5413 is a path for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the lead-in path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed to extend leftward and downward from the lower end of the introduction path 5412 .

The right guide path 5414 is a path for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the lead-in path 5412 downward to the right. The right guide path 5414 is formed so as to extend downward and to the right from the lower end of the introduction path 5412, and the extended end is formed so as to extend downward. The right guide portion is formed from the upper and lower middle portions of the base member 5410 to the lower end portion. The right guide path 5414 has a guide portion 5414a.

The guide portion 5414a is for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 backward. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 and has a substantially arc shape in a side view.

The installation space 5415 is an internal space of the base member 5410 in which a clone 5440 and the like, which will be described later, are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the middle part of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the left end. The installation space 5415 communicates with the left guide path 5413 at its right end.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 129, the opening 5416 is a hole (entrance for inspection) for entering the game ball A at the time of inspection described later. The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side surface of the base member 5410 and passes through the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The opening 5416 is formed from the middle part of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the vicinity of the left end. The opening 5416 communicates with the upper end of the installation space 5415 . The opening 5416 is formed so that the width in the vertical direction is such that the game ball A can be entered, and the entire area of the opening 5416 is configured so that the game ball A can be entered from the front. The opening 5416 is closed by the glass door 13 when the player plays a game, and the game ball A cannot be entered.

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414 . A rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412 . The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotor 5421 , a pin 5422 , a metal plate 5423 and a magnet 5424 .

Rotating body 5421 is formed in a substantially inverted T-shape when viewed from the rear, having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending in the upward direction. As shown in FIG. 129, the rotating body 5421 includes a base portion 5421a, a projecting portion 5421b, a left receiving portion 5421c and a right receiving portion 5421d.

The base portion 5421a is a portion of the rotating body 5421 extending in the left-right direction. The base portion 5421a is formed so that its width in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the introduction path 5412 .

The projecting portion 5421b is a portion of the rotating body 5421 that extends upward. The projecting portion 5421b is formed to extend from the left-right central portion of the base portion 5421a.

The left receiving portion 5421c is a portion that receives the game ball A at the left portion of the rotating body 5421 . The left receiving portion 5421c is formed by the left upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the left side surface of the projecting portion 5421b.

The right receiving portion 5421d is a portion that receives the game ball A in the right portion of the rotating body 5421 . The right receiving portion 5421d is formed by the right portion of the upper surface of the base portion 5421a and the right side surface of the projecting portion 5421b.

The pin 5422 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted through the base 5421 a of the rotating body 5421 . The pin 5422 has its front end fixed to the base member 5410 and its rear end fixed to a plate member 5430 (see FIG. 128) described later. Thereby, the pin 5422 supports the rotating body 5421 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the base member 5410 .

The metal plate 5423 is a plate-shaped member fixed to the rear side surface of the base 5421 a of the rotating body 5421 . The metal plate 5423 is formed such that its left end and right end are larger than the other portions. The metal plate 5423 is made of a magnetic material such as iron that is attracted by magnetic force.

A magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 128 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a pressing member 5460 which will be described later and arranged behind the metal plate 5423 . The magnet 5424 attracts the left end of the metal plate 5423 to hold the rotor 5421 with the right receiving portion 5421d facing upward and the left receiving portion 5421c facing left as shown in FIG.

A notch (not shown) extending in the horizontal direction is formed in the lower surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is arranged inside the notch. Rotation of the rotating body 5421 exceeding a predetermined angular range is restricted by the notch appropriately abutting on the protrusion. The predetermined angular range is a range from the state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to the state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward (the state shown in FIG. 133). The rotating body 5421 can rotate counterclockwise in a rear view from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. In addition, the rotating body 5421 can be rotated clockwise in rear view from a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward to a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward.

In the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 configured in this way, the rotating body 5421 rotates in an appropriate direction, and the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 is guided to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. Allocate. It should be noted that the distribution operation of the game ball A by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the plate member 5430 is for covering the right rear portion of the base member 5410. As shown in FIGS. The plate member 5430 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate member 5430 is formed so that its vertical width and horizontal width are wider than the vertical width and horizontal width of the base member 5410 . The plate member 5430 has a left through hole 5431 and a right through hole 5432 .

The left through-hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the left portion of the plate-like member 5430 . The left through-hole 5431 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 when viewed from the front.

The right through-hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion of the plate-like member 5430 . The right through-hole 5432 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The right through-hole 5432 is formed to have a size through which the game ball A can pass.

The plate member 5430 is arranged behind the base member 5410 and fixed to the base member 5410 with screws. Thereby, the left through-hole 5431 communicates with the installation space 5415 . The right through-hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414 .

As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the croon 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing the game balls A. As shown in FIG. The croon 5440 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view, and is configured so that the game ball A can roll on its upper surface. Also, the upper side surface of the croon 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually slopes downward toward its center. That is, the upper surface of the croon 5440 is formed into a shape capable of guiding the game ball A to the central portion. The crew 5440 includes a connecting portion 5441 , a first starting port 5442 , out ports 5443 and 5444 and a protruding portion 5445 .

The connecting portion 5441 is a portion formed so as to extend rightward from the front end portion of the upper surface of the croon 5440 (a portion having a substantially circular shape in a plan view). The connecting portion 5441 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the right end thereof. In addition, the connecting portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A to the left.

The first starting port 5442 is a substantially circular hole in plan view formed in the front portion of the croon 5440 . The first starting port 5442 vertically penetrates the cloon 5440 . The first starting port 5442 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter.

The out port 5443 is a generally circular hole in a plan view formed in the left rear portion of the crew 5440 (left rear of the first starting port 5442). The out port 5444 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the right rear portion of the crewne 5440 (to the right of the out port 5443). The out ports 5443 and 5444 are formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5442 .

The projecting portion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid-shaped portion formed in the central portion of the croon 5440 . The protrusion 5445 is formed to protrude upward from the top surface of the crown 5440 . The protruding part 5445 makes the game ball A enter the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 by appropriately flipping the game ball A guided by the clown 5440 . Thereby, the game ball A guided by the crew 5440 can be distributed to the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444.

The croon 5440 configured in this manner is fixed to the plate member 5430 with screws. A front end of the croon 5440 protrudes forward from the left through-hole 5431 and is disposed above the installation space 5415 . The connecting portion 5441 is connected at its right end to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413, and is configured to be able to guide the game ball A guided to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413 in the left direction. Also, the clown 5440 is positioned rearwardly and downwardly of the opening 5416 . As a result, the first starting port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 are configured so that the game ball A can be directly entered from the opening 5416 in the test described later (see FIG. 134).

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the pressing member 5460 described below. The guide member 5450 is formed in such a shape that the upper surface of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member is appropriately recessed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed so that its width in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the croon 5440 . The guide member 5450 includes a protrusion 5451 , a mounting portion 5452 , a front guideway 5453 and a rear guideway 5454 .

The protruding portion 5451 is a portion that protrudes rearward from the left rear end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450 . The projecting portion 5451 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.

The mounting portion 5452 is a recess formed in the front end portion of the upper surface of the guide member 5450 . The mounting portion 5452 has a side wall and a bottom surface that are substantially U-shaped in plan view. A first starting switch 5472 described later is attached to the attachment portion 5452 .

The front side guide path 5453 is a recess formed in the upper surface of the guide member 5450 and is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5442 to the pressing member 5460 . The front guide path 5453 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view such that it extends rightward and the extended end extends rearward. The front side guide path 5453 is disposed below the mounting portion 5452 at its front portion.

The rear side guide path 5454 is a recess formed in the rear portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450 and is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the pressing member 5460 . The rear guide path 5454 extends rightward and is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view such that the extended end extends rearward. A rear guide path 5454 is formed between the projecting portion 5451 and the mounting portion 5452 . The rear guide path 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guide path 5453 .

The guide member 5450 configured in this manner is fixed to the lower portion of the crown 5440 by screws. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-like member 5430 via the crown 5440 and arranged below the installation space 5415 . The mounting portion 5452 and the front side guide path 5453 are arranged below the first starting port 5442 of the clown 5440 and are connected to the left side guiding path 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first starting port 5442 . The rear guide path 5454 has its left end and right front end located below the out ports 5443 and 5444 and is connected to the left guide path 5413 via the out ports 5443 and 5444 .

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate member 5430 from behind. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 from the rear. The pressing member 5460 is formed in such a shape that its front side surface is appropriately recessed in the rearward direction. The pressing member 5460 includes a mounting portion 5461 , a right ejection path 5462 , a front ejection path 5463 and a rear ejection path 5464 .

The mounting portion 5461 is a depression formed in the upper left portion of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460 . The mounting portion 5461 is formed in a generally arcuate shape in a plan view so as to follow the shape of the rear portion of the croon 5440 . The mounting portion 5461 is formed from the left end portion of the pressing member 5460 to the left and right middle portions. The mounting portion 5461 is recessed downward from the other portions from the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower surface to the left and right halfway portions.

The right discharge path 5462 is a passage for discharging the game ball A that has passed through the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400 . The right discharge passage 5462 extends rearward and is shaped such that the lower surface of the extended end is open to the outside. The right discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460 .

The front discharge path 5463 is a recess formed in the lower part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 is discharged from the game ball sorting device 5400. It is a passage for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5463 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The front discharge path 5463 is formed below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge path 5462 . The front discharge path 5463 is formed to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460 .

The rear discharge path 5464 is a recess formed in the lower left part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and distributes game balls A guided to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450. It is a passage for discharging to the outside of the device 5400 . The rear side discharge path 5464 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The rear discharge path 5464 is arranged below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge path 5463 . The rear discharge path 5464 is formed to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460 .

The pressing member 5460 configured in this way is fixed to the rear side surface of the plate-like member 5430 by a screw, and closes the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 (the front side guide path 5453 and the rear side guide path 5454) from the rear direction. do. The rear portion of the croon 5440 is placed on the placement portion 5461 . In addition, the projecting portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is placed on the portion of the placing portion 5461 that is recessed downward. The right discharge passage 5462 is connected at its front end to the right through hole 5432 . The front discharge path 5463 is connected at its upper end to the rear end of the front guide path 5453 . The rear discharge path 5464 is connected at its upper end to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454 .

The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the gaming ball A has entered the right side guide path 5414, the front side guide path 5453 and the rear side guide path 5454. FIG. The sensor group 5470 includes an out port switch 5471 , a first starting port switch 5472 and an out port switch 5473 .

The out port switch 5471 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 . The out port switch 5471 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction. The out port switch 5471 has a through hole 5471a.

The through hole 5471a is a substantially circular hole in a front view that penetrates the out port switch 5471 in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5471a has an inner diameter through which the game ball A can pass. A through hole 5471 a is formed below the out port switch 5471 .

The out port switch 5471 configured in this manner is attached to the right front end portion of the pressing member 5460 . Thereby, the through hole 5471 a is arranged behind the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 . Out mouth switch 5471, for example, while forming a magnetic field in the through-hole 5471a, is configured to detect an eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through-hole 5471a). The out port switch 5471 detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

The first starting port switch 5472 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front side guide path 5453 . The first start switch 5472 is configured in the same manner as the out switch 5471 except that the plate surface thereof faces the vertical direction and that it is attached to the attachment portion 5452 of the guide member 5450 . The through hole 5472a is arranged between the first starting port 5442 and the front guide path 5453 .

The out port switch 5473 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear guide path 5454 . The out port switch 5473 is configured in the same manner as the first start port switch 5472 except that it is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the pressing member 5460 . The through hole 5473a is arranged below the rear discharge passage 5464 .

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the game ball distribution device 5400 configured in this manner has a first passage 5501 and a second passage 5502 as passages for distributing the game balls A flowing in from the inflow port 5411. equip.

It should be noted that the first start opening and the second start opening may be integrally provided in the game ball distribution device 5400 . In that case, for example, the out port switch 5471 is configured as the first start port switch, and the first start port switch 5472 is configured as the second start port switch. Also, a sensor may be provided at the out port and used as the V area at a specific timing.

The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding game balls A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . The first passage 5501 includes the left side guide path 5413 of the base member 5410, the connecting portion 5441 of the croon 5440, the first starting port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444, the front side guide path 5453 and the rear side guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, and a front side discharge path 5463 and a rear side discharge path 5464 of the pressing member 5460 . The first passageway 5501 splits into two passageways at cloon 5440 . The first passage 5501 has a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as branched passages.

The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5442 of the croon 5440 . The third passage 5503 is configured by the first starting port 5442 of the cloon 5440 , the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 and the front discharge path 5463 of the pressing member 5460 .

The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the croon 5440 . The fourth passage 5504 is configured by the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the crew 5440, the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear discharge path 5464 of the pressing member 5460.

The second path 5502 is a path for guiding game balls A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . The second passage 5502 is constituted by a right guide path 5414 of the base member 5410 , a right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 128) of the plate member 5430 and a right discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460 .

Next, the operation mode of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be described. In the following, as shown in FIG. 131, it is assumed that the game ball A is entered from the inflow port 5411 with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward.

First, the game ball A entering the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotor 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . As a result, the rotor 5421 and the metal plate 5423 rotate counterclockwise in rear view. By this rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes it to the second path 5502 (right guide path 5414). The right end of the metal plate 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128) when it is rotated until the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. As a result, the rotor 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 133).

The game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502 (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A2") is guided downward along the right guide path 5414 and then guided backward by the guide portion 5414a. The game ball A2 passes through the right through-hole 5432 (see FIG. 127) of the plate member 5430 in the backward direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 132, the game ball A2 is guided to the front end of the right discharge path 5462 of the holding member 5460. As shown in FIG. At this time, the game ball A2 passes through the through hole 5471a of the out port switch 5471 in the backward direction. As a result, the out port switch 5471 detects that the game ball A2 has been distributed to the second path 5502 (right guide path 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5471a is guided rearward through the right discharge path 5462 and discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400.

Thus, in the second passage 5502, the right guide path 5414, the right through hole 5432, and the right discharge path 5462 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. Further, the second passage 5502 is arranged downstream of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, and an out port switch 5471 is provided in the middle thereof.

Also, as shown in FIG. 133, when the game ball A is entered into the inlet 5411 of the base member 5410 with the left receiving portion 5421c facing upward, the game ball A moves to the left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving portion 5421c. As a result, the rotor 5421 and the metal plate 5423 rotate clockwise when viewed from the back. By this rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes it to the first passage 5501 (left guide path 5413). The left end of the metal plate 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128) when it is rotated until the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward. As a result, the rotor 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 131).

The game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 is guided in the lower left direction through the left guide path 5413, and then guided to the vicinity of the first starting port 5442 through the connecting portion 5441 of the croon 5440. The game ball A is guided along the upper side surface of the croon 5440 in the clockwise direction in plan view, and is gradually guided to the central portion of the croon 5440 . At this time, the projecting portion 5445 of the croon 5440 flips the game ball A appropriately. By this, the crew 5440 makes the game ball A enter either the first starting port 5442 or the out port 5443/5444. In this way, the clown 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third path 5503 or the fourth path 5504 .

Thus, the first passage 5501 includes, in order from the upstream side, the left guide passage 5413, the connection portion 5441, the upper surface of the croon 5440 (a substantially circular portion in plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage. A passageway 5504 is provided. The opening 5416 is formed so as to open to the connecting portion 5441 and the top surface of the croon 5440 . That is, the opening 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper surfaces of the connecting portion 5441 and the cloon 5440 (downstream of the left guide path 5413 and upstream of the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Also, the first passage 5501 is arranged downstream of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 .

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A3”) distributed to the third passage 5503 (entered the first start port 5442) is the first start It passes through the through hole 5472a of the mouth switch 5472 downward. Thereby, the first starting port switch 5472 detects that the game ball A3 has been distributed to the third passage 5503 (front side guide path 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5472a is guided to the left front end of the front side guide path 5453. As shown in FIG. Then, the game ball A3 is guided to the right through the front guide path 5453 and then to the rear, and guided to the upper end of the front discharge path 5463 . The game ball A3 is guided downward through the front side discharge path 5463 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. - 特許庁

Thus, in the third passage 5503, the first starting port 5442, the front guide path 5453, and the front discharge path 5463 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. Also, the third passage 5503 is provided with a first starting port switch 5472 in the middle thereof.

On the other hand, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A4") distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (entered in the out ports 5443 and 5444) is guided to the left front end of the rear guide passage 5454. be done. Then, the game ball A4 is guided rightward through the rear guide path 5454, then guided backward, and is guided to the upper end portion of the rear discharge path 5464. - 特許庁The game ball A4 is guided downward through the rear side discharge path 5464 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. - 特許庁At this time, the game ball A4 passes through the through hole 5473a of the out port switch 5473 downward. As a result, the out port switch 5473 detects that the game ball A4 has been distributed to the fourth path 5504 (rear side guide path 5454).

Thus, in the fourth passage 5504, the out ports 5443 and 5444, the rear side guide path 5454, and the rear side discharge path 5464 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the fourth passage 5504 is provided with an outlet switch 5473 in the middle thereof.

As described above, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first path 5501 or the second path 5502 in order (with a probability of 1/2). In addition, the crew 5440 distributes the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/3, and distributes it to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of 2/3. . That is, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the crew 5440 distribute the game ball A entered into the inflow port 5411 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6, and the fourth with a probability of 2/6. Allotted to passage 5504 .

Here, the game ball sorting device 5400 is inspected during manufacturing and maintenance in the hall. In the inspection, the glass door 13 is opened and the game ball A is directly entered into the game ball sorting device 5400, and the flow of the game ball A and the operation of the outlet switch 5471 and the like are confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 131 , when inspecting the second passage 5502 , a game ball A is entered from the inlet 5411 of the base member 5410 . At this time, the game ball A is distributed to the second path 5502 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 with a probability of 1/2. In the inspection, the flow of game balls A2 distributed to the second passage 5502 is confirmed. Further, by confirming whether or not the outlet switch 5471 has detected that the game ball A2 has passed through the through hole 5471a, the operation of the outlet switch 5471 is confirmed (see FIG. 132).

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, when inspecting the first passage 5501, game balls A3 and A4 are entered from the opening 5416 of the base member 5410 to the croon 5440. As shown in FIG. In this way, in the inspection, the opening 5416 allows game balls A3 and A4 to be distributed from the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400 to the distribution destination of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 (the first passage 5501, in this embodiment, the crew 5440). can be entered. By inspecting the third path 5503 and the fourth path 5504 with such game balls A3 and A4, the first path 5501 is inspected.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 134, when inspecting the third passage 5503, the game ball A3 is directly entered from the opening 5416 to the first starting port 5442. As shown in FIGS. As a result, the game ball A3 is directly entered into the third passage 5503 without being sorted by the cloon 5440. - 特許庁In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A3 entered into the third passage 5503 is confirmed. Further, by confirming whether or not the first starting port switch 5472 has detected that the game ball A3 has passed through the through hole 5472a, the operation of the first starting port switch 5472 is confirmed (see FIG. 128). . In this way, the first starting port switch 5472 can detect the game ball A3 entered from the opening 5416 in the inspection, so it can be said that it is located downstream of the opening 5416 .

When inspecting the fourth passage 5504, the game ball A4 is directly entered from the opening 5416 to the out ports 5443 and 5444. As a result, the game ball A4 is directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being sorted by the cloon 5440. - 特許庁In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A4 entered into the fourth passage 5504 is confirmed. Further, by confirming whether or not the outlet switch 5473 has detected that the game ball A4 has passed through the through hole 5473a, the operation of the outlet switch 5473 is confirmed. In this way, the out port switch 5473 can detect the game ball A4 entered from the opening 5416 in the inspection, so it can be said that the out port switch 5473 is located downstream of the opening 5416 .

According to the game ball distribution device 5400 according to this embodiment, the game balls A3 and A4 can enter from the opening 5416 to the croon 5440 . As a result, the game balls A3 and A4 can enter the first path 5501 directly without being sorted by the rotation sorting mechanism 5420 . Therefore, when inspecting the first path 5501, all the game balls A3 and A4 can enter the first path 5501 (the second path 5502 can be entered with a probability of 1/2 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420). (cannot be sorted into). As a result, the first passage 5501 can be efficiently inspected.

In addition, the game ball distribution device 5400 can directly enter the game ball A3 from the opening 5416 to the first starting port 5442 of the croon 5440 . According to this, the game ball A3 can be directly entered into the third passage 5503 without being sorted by the crew 5440. - 特許庁As a result, when inspecting the third passage 5503, all game balls A3 can enter the third passage 5503 (they are not assigned to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of 2/3 by the clown 5440). Therefore, inspection of the third passage 5503 can be efficiently performed.

Here, if a game ball A is entered from the inflow port 5411 to inspect the third passage 5503, the game ball A is distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the crew 5440, and is reduced to 1/6. The game ball A can enter the third path 5503 only with probability. On the other hand, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment can enter the game ball A3 into the third path 5503 with a probability of 100%. According to this, it is possible to efficiently inspect the third path 5503, which has the lowest distribution probability.

Also, the game ball distribution device 5400 can directly enter the game ball A4 from the opening 5416 to the out ports 5443 and 5444 . According to this, the game ball A4 can be directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being sorted by the crew 5440. - 特許庁As a result, when inspecting the fourth passage 5504, all game balls A4 can enter the fourth passage 5504 (they are not assigned to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/3 by the clown 5440). Therefore, inspection of the fourth passage 5504 can be efficiently performed.

As described above, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment uses the first passage 5501 (the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504) without being distributed to the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the crew 5440. can be inspected. According to this, the game ball sorting device 5400 can be inspected efficiently. Regarding the inspection of the second passage 5502, the game ball A is distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 for the convenience of entering the game ball A from the inlet 5411. , the ball can enter the second passage 5502 . Therefore, the inspection of the game ball sorting device 5400 is not greatly delayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment is provided with two means for distributing the game balls A (including the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the crew 5440), but is limited to this. Instead, it is sufficient that at least one means for distributing the game balls A is provided.

In addition, in the game ball distribution device 5400, the means for distributing the game balls A (the rotating distribution mechanism 5420 and the croon 5440) do not necessarily have to have different structures, and the means for distributing the game balls A may have the same structure. may Specifically, the game ball distribution device 5400 may include two clons 5440 or two rotation distribution mechanisms 5420 .

Also, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), but is not limited to this, and three or more passages. The game ball A may be distributed to the .

In addition, the cloon 5440 distributes the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), but is not limited to this, and the game ball is distributed to three or more passages. A may be distributed.

In addition, the base member 5410 may have an opening into which the game ball A can enter in the lower right portion of the front side surface (the position overlapping the right guide path 5414 in a front view). With this configuration, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A can be directly entered into the second passage 5502 from the opening. As a result, the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 can be efficiently inspected. In this case, the opening 5416 and the opening formed in the lower right portion of the front side surface of the base member 5410 function as openings that allow the flow to flow into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 individually. do. In addition, the out port switch 5471 functions as second detecting means capable of detecting the game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502 .

In addition, the opening 5416 has a shape large enough to allow the game ball A to enter directly into the first starting port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the crew 5440, but the shape of the opening 5416 is limited to this. not to be The opening 5416 may have a shape that allows the game ball A to enter the upper surface of the croon 5440, for example, it is small enough to prevent the game ball A from entering the first start hole 5442 and the out holes 5443 and 5444 directly. It may be in shape. Specifically, the shape of the opening 5416 may be substantially circular in a front view having an inner diameter substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball A, or the like.

Also, the configurations of the out port switch 5471, the first starting port switch 5472 and the out port switch 5473 are not limited to this embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by appropriate means.

In addition, as another embodiment of the game ball distribution device 5400, unlike the game ball distribution device 5400 described above (first embodiment), even if the positions of the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443, 5444 are reversed good. By providing the inflow port of the first starting port 5442 on the far side of the cloon 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts through the opening 5416. Furthermore, a passage provided with sensors (more specifically, a passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) is provided at the back of the crown 5640 (that is, placed at a position far from the opening 5416), and the sensor A passage (passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) where no class is provided may be arranged at a position close to the opening 5416 . For example, the inlet on the far side (out port 5443 according to the first embodiment) is provided with a first start port switch, and the inlet on the far side (similarly, the outlet 5444) is provided with an outlet switch, A sensor should not be provided at the inflow port on the near side (similarly, the first starting port 5442). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent tampering with the sensor even when the opening 5416 is provided.

Also, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the out port switch 5473, the effect may be executed by the effect device (for example, the movable accessory unit 57), and the type of effect to be executed is determined. may The extraction timing of the effect condition determination random number referred to when determining the effect type may be the passage timing of the out exit switch 5473, or the effect is executed based on the number of passages of the out exit switch 5473 in a certain period. may In addition, it is also possible to carry out a suspended ball display based on the detection of a game ball by the out port switch 5471 or a variable display of decorative symbols. In this case, it is just an effect and has nothing to do with the profit given to the player.

It should be noted that the main control circuit 100 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the specific game determining means according to the present invention.
Also, the sub-control circuit 200 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect control means according to the present invention.
Moreover, the passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage for guiding the game balls circulated to the out port 5444 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the second passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage (third passage 5503) for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the first starting port 5442 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the third passage according to the present invention.
Also, the out port 5443 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the rear side inflow port according to the present invention.
In addition, the out port 5444 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of another inflow port on the far side according to the present invention.
Also, the first starting port 5442 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the front side inflow port according to the present invention.
Also, the first starting switch according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the specific detection means according to the present invention.
Also, the movable accessory unit 57 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect detection means according to the present invention.

Next, a game ball sorting device 5600 according to another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 135, a game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment is significantly different from the game ball distribution device 5400 according to this embodiment in that it does not have a rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . In addition, in FIG. 135, in order to make it easier to see the flow of the game ball A, the shape and direction of each member are schematically shown. A game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment includes an inflow port 5611 , an introduction path 5612 , a crew 5640 , a first start port switch 5671 and a second start port switch 5672 .

The inflow port 5611 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the front.

The introduction path 5612 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The introduction path 5612 is connected at its front end to the inflow port 5611 and configured to be able to guide the game ball A entered from the inflow port 5611 in the backward direction.

The crown 5640 is connected to the rear end of the lead-in path 5612 . The game ball A guided through the lead-in path 5612 enters the croon 5640 . The crew 5640 includes a first start port 5641, a second start port 5642, an out port 5643, and the like.

The first starting port 5641 is a substantially circular hole in plan view formed in the right front portion of the croon 5640 . The first starting port 5641 penetrates the croon 5640 in the vertical direction and has an inner diameter such that the game ball A can enter.

The second starting port 5642 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the left portion of the croon 5640 . The second starting port 5642 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5641 .

The out port 5643 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the right rear portion of the clown 5640 . The out port 5643 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5641 .

Creon 5640 configured in this way, by appropriately flipping the game ball A guided from the introduction path 5612 with a protrusion (not shown), the game ball A first start port 5641, second start port 5642 or out It can be diverted to any of the ports 5643 (three passages).

The first starting port switch 5671 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the first starting port 5641 . The first starting port switch 5671 is arranged in a first passage 5701, which will be described later, with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction. The first starting port switch 5671 is configured to be able to detect that the game ball A has entered by the same method as the out port switch 5471 according to the present embodiment.

The second starting port switch 5672 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the second starting port 5642 . The second starter switch 5672 is configured similarly to the first starter switch 5671 except that it is arranged in a second passage 5702 which will be described later.

The game ball sorting device 5600 configured in this manner comprises a first passage 5701 , a second passage 5702 and a third passage 5703 as passages for guiding the game balls A distributed by the cloon 5640 .

The first passage 5701 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5641 . First passage 5701 is formed to extend in the left-right direction. The first passage 5701 has its left end located below the first starting port 5641 and is connected to the first starting port 5641 .

The second passage 5702 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the second starting port 5642 . Second passage 5702 is formed to extend in the left-right direction. The second passage 5702 has its right end located below the second starting port 5642 and is connected to the second starting port 5642 .

The third passage 5703 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the out port 5643 . The third passage 5703 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The third passage 5703 has its front end located below the out port 5643 and is connected to the out port 5643 .

The game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment has openings 5616 and 5617 as openings for allowing the game ball A to enter the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 during inspection. equip.

The opening 5616 is a hole for allowing the game ball A to enter the first passage 5701 . The opening 5616 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The opening 5616 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The opening 5616 is formed in the left-right midway portion of the first passage 5701 . The opening 5616 is closed by an appropriate closing means when the player plays the game.

The opening 5617 is a hole for allowing the game ball A to enter the second passage 5702 . The opening 5617 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the opening 5616 . The openings 5617 are formed in the left and right middle portions of the second passage 5702 . The opening 5617 is closed by an appropriate closing means when the player plays the game.

According to the game ball sorting device 5600 according to another embodiment, the first passage 5701 can be inspected by directly entering the game ball A into the opening 5616 during inspection. Also, the second passage 5702 can be inspected by directly entering a game ball into the opening 5617 at the time of inspection. As described above, by providing the openings 5616 and 5617 that can enter the game ball A separately in the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702, the first start port 5641 or the second start port 5642 It is no longer necessary to aim and enter the game ball A. Therefore, the game ball A can easily enter the first path 5701 and the second path 5702 . According to this, it is possible to efficiently inspect the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 .

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a displacement member that can be displaced between a first position where it is easy for a game ball to pass and a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass through a passage area. is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2014-18304.

In this technique, a sliding attacker is provided as the displacement member. The slide type attacker is configured to be movable so as to protrude from the game board toward the player side. A linear solenoid is used as the drive source for moving the slide attacker. In this way, the sliding attacker can use the driving force generated by the solenoid to move so as to protrude from the game board toward the player.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the solenoid is arranged on the back side of the slide attacker, and the direction in which the plunger moves is the same as the direction in which the slide attacker moves. Such a configuration requires a large space in the depth direction of the pachinko machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be made compact in the depth direction.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 on which game balls roll;
A large winning opening 540 (passing area) provided in the game board 17 and through which game balls can pass;
A shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced between a first position where it is easy for a game ball to pass and a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass with respect to the big winning opening 540 (passage area);
A large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member);
Guidance paths 430 and 530 for guiding game balls to the big winning opening 540 (passing area);
with
The large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) moves the shutter 610 (displacement member) in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the direction in which the shutter 610 (displacement member) moves from the first position to the second position (horizontal direction). While generating a force to drive 610 (displacement member),
A link arm 630 (driving direction changing means) that converts the direction of the force generated from the big winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) to the direction of moving from the first position to the second position,
The big winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged on the front side from the end of the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means) on the back side of the gaming machine.

With such a configuration, the driving direction of the big winning opening solenoid 620 is not the front and back direction in which the shutter 610 slides, but the left and right direction, and the rear end of the big winning opening solenoid 620 is moved from the rear end of the link arm 630. The depth of the attacker unit 500 can be narrowed by arranging it forward. Thus, the pachinko game machine 1 can be made compact in the depth direction.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1,
The big winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged below the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means).

With such a configuration, the big winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) and the link arm 630 (link mechanism) can have a two-story structure. That is, the depth direction of the pachinko game machine 1 can be made compact compared to the case where the big winning opening solenoid 620 and the link arm 630 are arranged side by side in the depth direction, for example.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1
A first guideway 531 (second guideway) having a guide portion 611 (bottom portion) of the shutter 610 and a front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion),
The shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the second position by moving from the first position toward the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion),
The guide portion 611 (bottom portion) of the shutter 610 is formed by displacing the shutter 610 (displacement member) to the second position,
When displaced to the second position, there is a gap through which a game ball cannot pass between the guide portion 611 (bottom portion) and the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion).

With such a configuration, the distance that the shutter 610 moves when opening and closing can be shortened. Thus, the pachinko game machine 1 can be made compact in the depth direction.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique for passing many game balls through a predetermined passage area at once is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2004-313481.

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, a game ball container is provided that can store a plurality of game balls that have fallen on the game board and that can release the storage. In such a configuration, when the storage is released in a state in which a plurality of game balls are stored in the game ball storage body, the game ball storage body moves the stored game balls to a predetermined passage area by its operation. can be passed through. That is, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, many game balls can be passed through a predetermined passing area at once.

In the above-described conventional pachinko machine, the game ball containers are driven by a dedicated driving means, which causes an increase in cost.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of passing a large number of game balls through a predetermined passage area at once without providing a dedicated driving means. With the goal.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 on which game balls roll;
A large winning opening 540 (passing area) provided in the game board 17 and through which game balls can pass;
A shutter 610 that can be displaced between an open state (first mode) in which the passage of game balls is easy and a closed state (second mode) in which the passage of game balls is difficult with respect to the big winning opening 540 (passing area). (displacement member);
A large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member);
Guidance paths 430 and 530 that can guide game balls to the big winning opening 540 (passing area),
with
The taxiways 430 and 530 are
A first guideway 531 (first guideway) having a deceleration rib 534 (decelerating means) capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball;
A second guideway 532 (second guideway) that guides the game ball to the upstream side of the first guideway 531 (first guideway);
Including a second guideway 432 (third guideway) that guides the game ball to the downstream side of the first guideway 531 (first guideway),
Said second taxiway 432 (third taxiway), the game ball that has moved on said first taxiway 531 (first taxiway), said second taxiway 432 (third taxiway) It is arranged at a position where it can collide with the moving game ball.

With such a configuration, in the first guideway 531, game balls guided through different guideways can collide with each other. In this way, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 can be further reduced, and it becomes easier to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531. . That is, it is possible to win (pass) many game balls to the big winning hole 540 at once without providing a dedicated driving means.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1,
The second guidepath 532 (second guidepath) and the second guidepath 432 (third guidepath) are arranged in the second guideway when the shutter 610 (displacement member) is in the first mode. A game ball that has moved through the guideway 532 (second guideway) and the second guideway 432 (third guideway) is arranged at a position where it can flow into the big winning opening 540 (passing area). It is.

With such a configuration, since game balls can be guided to the first guideway 531 (and thus the third guideway 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, a relatively large number of game balls can be won in a short period of time. The mouth 540 can be awarded. That is, it is possible to quickly digest the rounds in the jackpot game.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball passes through a starting area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, the display device is displayed. A display control means is provided for performing control for variably displaying a pattern as identification information on the display area and for performing control for deriving and displaying the variably displayed pattern. (display mode)), the game is shifted to a big win game state (so-called "big win") advantageous to the player.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a plurality of movable bodies are stacked and arranged on one side of a base member (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (on the player side). there is The first movable body, the second movable body and the third movable body are appropriately supported with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine, since the plurality of movable bodies are concentrated on one side of the base member, the center of gravity of the plurality of movable bodies as a whole is far from the base member. Therefore, a large moment of inertia is generated when the plurality of movable bodies are actuated. As a result, the plurality of movable bodies may swing, and the movable bodies may come into contact with each other.

Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 (game machine) according to the present embodiment includes a plate-shaped base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached, and a first movable body 1600 (first ), a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 (second movable bodies) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, and movement control of the first movable body 1600 and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 A first movable body 1600 and a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are controlled by the movement control means 1800 to a production position that is easy for the player to visually recognize and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The first movable body 1600 is arranged closer to the player than the base member 1500 when it is controlled to move to the effect position, and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are arranged to move to the effect position. It is characterized in that it is arranged closer to the inside of the game machine than the base member 1500 when it is controlled to move to the position.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700).
That is, since the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located inside or near the base member 1500, when the movable bodies (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) operate, It is possible to reduce the moment of inertia that is generated, and suppress the rocking (vibration, etc.) of the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700). This can suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700).

In addition, the first movable body 1600 is composed of a single movable body and is arranged in the center of the base member 1500, and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 is composed of a plurality of movable bodies (the second movable bodies 1700 ) and arranged as a pair of movable bodies at symmetrical positions.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700).
That is, in the left-right direction, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is positioned at the left-right central portion of the second movable accessory unit 82 or a portion close to it, so the movable body (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) can be suppressed more effectively. In addition, while the center of gravity is positioned near the center of the left and right, the first movable body 1600 arranged in the center and the second movable bodies 1700 arranged in a pair on the left and right can perform various effects.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball has passed through a starting area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, the display device A display control means is provided for performing control to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of , and to perform control for deriving and displaying the variably displayed pattern, and the derived and displayed pattern is a predetermined combination ( A special display mode) is provided in which the player is shifted to a big win game state (so-called "big win") that is advantageous to the player.

Also, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a movable body is driven by a driving means (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-346103). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document can drive a sprocket (rotating body) by a drive motor (driving means), and can pay out game balls or the like as the sprocket rotates.

The drive motor has a plurality of fixed coils. The drive motor can rotate the sprocket by sequentially applying a current to a plurality of coils to sequentially excite them. In addition, the drive motor can keep the sprocket in a stopped state by continuing to apply current to only a predetermined phase of the plurality of coils.

However, the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine needs to maintain the excitation of the coil of the predetermined phase in order to hold the sprocket in a stopped state, thus wasting power and shortening the life of the drive motor. was at a disadvantage.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a first movable body 1600 (movable body) that is controlled to move between a production position that is easy for the player to visually recognize and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and a first A pachinko game machine 1 comprising a movement control means 1800 capable of controlling the movement of a movable body 1600, wherein the movement control means 1800 includes a motor 1810 (driving means) and a driving force generated by the motor 1810 as a first movable body. and a driving force transmission mechanism 1820 that transmits to the body 1600. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 converts a rotational force generated by a second transmission gear 1823 (rotating body) and the second transmission gear 1823 into a linear force. A conversion mechanism (arm 1824) that converts, and a reciprocating motion transmission means (arm 1824) that transmits the linear force generated by the conversion mechanism as a force to move the first movable body 1600 in the vertical direction, The first movable body 1600 is controlled to move upward by rotating the second transmission gear 1823 in the clockwise direction (first direction) in front view within the angle range Y (predetermined angle range). When the gear 1823 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (second direction) in the front view within the angle range Y, the downward movement is controlled, and the second transmission gear 1823 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view beyond the angle range Y. When the second transmission gear 1823 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view beyond the angle range Y, it rotates clockwise in front view beyond the angle range X (specific angle range). It is characterized by providing a first elongated hole 1824b (movement restricting means) for restricting rotation in the direction.

By configuring in this way, power consumption can be suppressed.
That is, since the first movable body 1600 can be held at a predetermined position without supplying power to the motor 1810, power consumption can be suppressed. Moreover, this can prevent the life of the motor 1810 from being shortened.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is characterized in that the first movable body 1600 is controlled to move to the standby position by the arm 1824 while the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 is restricted by the first elongated hole 1824b. and

With this configuration, the first movable body 1600 can be held at the standby position without wasting power.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball has passed through a starting area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, the display device A display control means is provided for performing control to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of , and to perform control for deriving and displaying the variably displayed pattern, and the derived and displayed pattern is a predetermined combination ( A special display mode) is provided in which the player is shifted to a big win game state (so-called "big win") that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a plurality of movable bodies are stacked and arranged on one side of a base member (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (on the player side). there is The first movable body, the second movable body and the third movable body are appropriately supported with respect to the base member.

The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body can each move between an initial position (accommodated position) and a movement position (rendering position). By moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the initial position to the movement position, the decorative portion can be greatly expanded and an appropriate effect can be performed. Also, by moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from their respective movement positions to their initial positions, it is possible to make the decorative portion less visible to the player.

In the above conventional pachinko machine, when the first movable body, the second movable body and the third movable body of the movable effect device are in their respective initial positions, the first movable body, the second movable body and the third movable body are used as the base. It is arranged in a laminated state on one side of the member. For this reason, if a strong impact is applied to the movable effect device when the movable effect device is transported, for example, there is a risk that the movable bodies will come into contact with each other and be damaged.

Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a plate-shaped base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached, and a first movable body 1600 (first movable body) attached to one surface side of the base member 1500. , a second movable body 1700 (second movable body) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, and a movement control means 1800 that controls movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be controlled to move by the movement control means 1800 between a performance position that is easy for the player to visually recognize and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. is accommodated on the one surface side when the movement is controlled to the standby position, and the second movable body 1700 is accommodated on the other surface side when the movement is controlled to the standby position. is.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.
That is, in a state in which the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are accommodated (the state in the standby position), the distance between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.

Also, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are characterized in that they are arranged at positions where they cannot come into contact with each other by the base member 1500 when they are controlled to move to the standby position.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.
That is, in the state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are accommodated (the state in the standby position), the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are partitioned by the base member 1500. , the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies can be effectively suppressed.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball passes through a starting area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, the display device is displayed. A display control means is provided for performing control for variably displaying a pattern as identification information on the display area and for performing control for deriving and displaying the variably displayed pattern. (display mode)), the game is shifted to a big win game state (so-called "big win") advantageous to the player.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable is not easily pulled out of the connector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104294). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat portion of the flat cable with another member. Accordingly, the wiring guide can restrict the movement or bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the plane portion, and thus can prevent the flat cable from being easily pulled out of the connector.

However, although the above conventional pachinko machine can restrict the movement of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat portion, it restricts the movement in the direction parallel to the flat portion (for example, the width direction of the flat cable). not a thing Therefore, the flat cable may be obliquely inserted into the connector. If the flat cable is obliquely inserted into the connector, it is disadvantageous in that problems such as a short circuit or malfunction may occur.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a substrate 1720 on which an LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, a connector 1760 provided on the substrate 1720 and connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 connected to the connector 1760. , and has a guide portion 1714 that abuts on at least one end of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction and defines the insertion direction of the flat cable 1770 into the connector 1760. A base member 1710 (direction determining means) is provided so that the direction in which the flat cable 1770 is guided when the guide portion 1714 and the flat cable 1770 come into contact is the same as the direction in which the connector 1760 is inserted. It is characterized in that the portion where the cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 is provided so as to be visible from the outside.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the flat cable 1770 .
That is, by guiding the flat cable 1770 in the insertion direction of the connector 1760 by the guide portion 1714, the flat cable 1770 can be obliquely inserted into the connector 1760, or the connector can be moved as the second movable body 1700 moves. 1760 can be prevented from falling out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects such as malfunction of the LED 1721 .

Further, the flat cable 1770 is characterized by being provided with a plurality of power lines 1771 having different voltages.

By configuring in this way, occurrence of a short circuit of the flat cable 1770 can be suppressed.
In other words, by appropriately guiding the flat cable 1770, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a short circuit between the power supply lines 1771 having a voltage difference.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball has passed through a starting area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, the display device A display control means is provided for performing control to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of , and to perform control for deriving and displaying the variably displayed pattern, and the derived and displayed pattern is a predetermined combination ( A special display mode) is provided in which the player is shifted to a big win game state (so-called "big win") that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable is not easily pulled out of the connector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104294). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat portion of the flat cable with another member. Accordingly, the wiring guide can restrict the movement or bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the plane portion, and thus can prevent the flat cable from being easily pulled out of the connector.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine described above, the flat cable is sandwiched between the flat portions of the wiring guide. Therefore, when a certain amount of tension is applied to the flat cable, the wiring guide may move. That is, the above-described conventional pachinko machine is disadvantageous in that the wiring guide may not have sufficient force for holding the flat cable.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a substrate 1720 on which an LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, a base member 1710 (first member) to which the substrate 1720 is fixed, and at least a part of the substrate 1720. A pachinko game machine 1 comprising a cover member 1740 (second member) for covering, a connector 1760 provided on a substrate 1720 and connected to an LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 (wiring member) connected to the connector 1760 The base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 are in contact with each other at a predetermined abutting portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710), and the space formed by the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 , a board 1720 and at least a part of a connector 1760 are accommodated, and the flat cable 1770 is arranged along a predetermined wiring route from the connector 1760 to the outside of the space, and at a predetermined position of the wiring route, the flat cable 1770 It is characterized in that it is sandwiched between the mating parts and fixed in a bent state.

By configuring in this way, the holding force of the flat cable 1770 can be improved.
That is, by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 in a bent state, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held. In addition, there is no need to separately prepare a member for holding flat cable 1770, and flat cable 1770 can be held using existing members (base member 1710 and cover member 1740).

In addition, a concave portion 1713a is provided in the butted portion of the base member 1710,
A convex portion 1741a is provided at the butted portion of the cover member 1740,
The flat cable 1770 is characterized in that it is sandwiched and fixed between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the holding force of the flat cable 1770 with a simple configuration.
That is, the flat cable 1770 can be fixed in a bent state only by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

Here, conventionally, the technique of a game machine having a rotatable circular base member and a reel seat with a plurality of patterns and attachable to the base member is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute projections formed on its outer circumference, and a reel sheet (reel band) having a mark formed at one longitudinal end. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using double-sided tape. At this time, one end in the length direction of the reel sheet is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one longitudinal end to the other longitudinal end. As described above, the reel seat is attached to the base member in a state in which the position in the circumferential direction is determined with respect to the base member.

However, since the reel seat is configured to be positioned on the base member only at one longitudinal end, it is difficult to position the reel seat with high precision. Therefore, during (or after) mounting the reel seat, the mark may be misaligned and realigned with the minute protrusion. At this time, since the reel sheet is peeled off from the base member and the positions of the marks are aligned again, the work of aligning the marks and attaching them to the base member becomes complicated. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the work efficiency of attaching the reel sheets to the base member was poor.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of the work of attaching reel seats to a base member. .

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko game machine 1 comprising a rotatable circular base member 2421 and a reel seat 2422 which is provided with a plurality of patterns C and can be attached to the base member 2421. The reel seat 2422 is provided with a plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c (position specifying means) that serve as guidelines for the mounting position of the base member 2421, and a first notch 2422a (first position specifying means). to the second notch 2422b (second position specifying means) in one direction in the rotational direction of the base member 2421, and the one-way distance L1a from the second notch 2422b to the third notch 2422c. The direction distance L2a is different.

By configuring in this way, the reel seat 2422 can be accurately positioned with respect to the base member 2421 . In addition, it is possible to form one pattern in which all the cutouts 2422a to 2422c and all the projections 2421a to 2421c are aligned. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of work for realigning the mounting position after mounting the reel seat 2422, and improve the efficiency of the work for mounting the reel seat 2422 on the base member 2421. FIG.

Further, the base member 2421 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c, and the plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c are: The projections 2421a to 2421c are configured to be engageable with the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c. and to prevent the reel seat 2422 from slipping in the rotation direction of the base member 2421 when the base member 2421 rotates.

With this configuration, the reel seat 2422 can be attached to the base member simply by engaging the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c with the first projection portion 2421a to the third projection portion 2421c. 2421 can be easily positioned. In addition, the reel seat 2422 can be held at a specific position of the base member 2421 (difficult to shift after positioning).
Further, since the reel seat 2422 can be reliably rotated integrally (prevented from relative rotation) when the base member 2421 is rotated, the predetermined symbol C can be reliably displayed to the player.

Here, conventionally, the technique of a game machine equipped with an effect device having a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet having a plurality of patterns and being attachable to the base member is well known. For example, as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute projections formed on its outer circumference, and a reel sheet (reel band) having a mark formed at one longitudinal end. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using double-sided tape. At this time, one end in the length direction of the reel sheet is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one longitudinal end to the other longitudinal end. As described above, the reel seat is attached to the base member at a specific position so as to be relatively non-rotatable.

However, since it is necessary to gradually attach the reel sheet to the base member after aligning the mark with the minute projection, it is difficult to attach the reel sheet to the base member efficiently. Moreover, when reusing the reel sheet and the base member, it is necessary to peel off the double-sided tape. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the double-sided tape is used to prevent the relative rotation between the base member and the reel seat (preventing the reel seat from deviating from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member). ), it has been difficult to improve detachability between the base member and the reel seat.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances as described above. To provide a game machine capable of improving detachability with respect to a reel seat.

A pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a performance device 3400 having a rotatable circular base member 3421 and a reel seat 3422 having a plurality of patterns C and attachable to the base member 3421. In the game machine 1, the base member 3421 is provided with three protrusions 3421a to 3421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the reel seat 3422, and the reel seat 3422 is provided with the base Three cutouts 3422a to 3422c (reel sheet engaging portions) that can be engaged with the member 3421 are provided, and the three cutouts 3422a to 3422c and the three projections 3421a to 3421c are engaged to achieve the A deviation prevention means is formed to position the reel seat 3422 at a specific position of the base member 3421 and to prevent deviation of the reel seat 3422 in the rotation direction of the base member 3421 when the base member 3421 rotates. It is something to do.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 3422 from deviating from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member 3421 . In addition, by engaging the three cutouts 3422a to 3422c with the three projections 3421a to 3421c, it is possible to perform positioning and attachment without using double-sided tape. can improve sexuality.

At least part of the base member 3421 is formed of a transparent member, and the reel seat 3422 is accommodated so that the surface of the reel seat 3422 is in contact with the inside of the base member 3421. At least part of the pattern C is visible from the outside of the base member 3421 through the transparent member.

By configuring in this way, the reel seat 3422 can be pressed against the base member 3421 by the force of the reel seat 3422 opening (spreading force) due to its elasticity. This makes it easy to fix the reel seat 3422 to the base member 3421 without using double-sided tape.

Here, conventionally, the technique of a game machine having a rotatable circular base member and a reel seat with a plurality of patterns and attachable to the base member is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute projections formed on its outer circumference, and a reel sheet (reel band) having a mark formed at one longitudinal end. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using double-sided tape. At this time, one end in the length direction of the reel sheet is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one longitudinal end to the other longitudinal end. As described above, the reel seat is attached to the base member in a state in which the position in the circumferential direction is determined with respect to the base member.

However, since it is necessary to gradually attach the reel sheet to the base member after aligning the mark with the minute projection, it is difficult to attach the reel sheet to the base member efficiently. Moreover, when reusing the reel sheet and the base member, it is necessary to peel off the double-sided tape.

Therefore, it is conceivable to roll up the reel seat and store it in the base member so that the reel seat can be attached to the base member without using double-sided tape, thereby improving the detachability between the base member and the reel seat. However, in such a configuration, the end portion of the reel seat in the circumferential direction may be deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction of the reel seat (see reel seat 4422 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, a gap is generated at the end of the reel seat in the circumferential direction, which may spoil the appearance.

As described above, in the game machine, it is difficult to improve the detachability between the base member and the reel seat and to maintain the appearance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine which can improve the detachability between the base member and the reel seat, and which can maintain its appearance. It is something to do.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko game machine 1 comprising a rotatable circular base member 4421 and a reel seat 4422 which is provided with a plurality of patterns C and can be attached to the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is made of a hollow cylindrical transparent member, and the reel seat 4422 is accommodated inside the base member 4421 so that the end portion of the reel seat 4422 partially overlaps. A pressing portion 4423 c (pressing member) for pressing the end portion of the reel seat 4422 is provided inside the base member 4421 .

With this configuration, the reel sheet 4422 can be attached to the base member 4421 without using double-sided tape. Thereby, the detachability between the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422 can be improved.
Further, deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d can be suppressed by the pressing portion 4423c, and formation of the gap S (see FIG. 125(b)) can be prevented. As a result, even when the light emitting unit 4430 (light emitting means) capable of irradiating the pattern C with light from the inner side of the reel sheet 4422 is provided, the light leaks from the end of the reel sheet 4422 in the circumferential direction. can be prevented. Therefore, the aesthetic appearance can be maintained.

Further, the pressing portion 4423c is composed of a member (left mounting member 4423) different from the base member 4421. As shown in FIG.

By configuring in this way, the reel seat 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421 . For example, if a pressing portion is formed on the base member 4421, the left end of the reel seat 4422 may be caught by the pressing portion when the reel seat 4422 is accommodated. In contrast, if the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left mounting member 4423 (a member that is fixed to the base member 4421 after the reel seat 4422 is accommodated) as in this embodiment, the reel seat 4422 is attached to the base member. The holding portion 4423c does not protrude from the base member 4421 when it is housed in the 4421. - 特許庁Therefore, the pressing portion 4423 c does not become an obstacle, and the reel seat 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421 .

Here, conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine equipped with a game ball sorting device provided with an inflow port into which game balls can flow has been known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-459.

The game ball distribution device (distribution device) includes an upper stage cloon, a lower stage cloon, a lid, and the like. The upper stage croon has three holes (falling area and two general areas) into which game balls can enter, and distributes game balls to two passages. The upper stage Krun guides the game ball to the lower stage Krun in one of the two paths. The lower stage crew has three holes (fall area, variable probability area and general area) into which game balls can enter, and distributes game balls to three passages. The lid is formed to cover the upper and lower crowns. The lid is provided with an inflow port or the like that allows game balls to enter the upper stage croon.

Such a game ball sorting device is generally checked for the flow of game balls and the operation of a sensor (such as a sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the probability variable area) in inspections at the time of manufacture. In the inspection, for example, a game ball is entered from the inlet of the lid portion, and the flow of the game ball guided to the upper cloon is checked. At this time, the game balls are distributed to either of the two passages by the upper cloon. Also, the game balls guided from the upper cloon to the lower cloon (distributed to the one passage) are distributed to any of the three passages by the lower cloon.

However, in such an inspection, game balls may not be assigned to the path to be inspected. In this case, the game ball is entered many times until the game ball is assigned to the path to be inspected. Also, if a game ball is configured to easily enter a path to be inspected (for example, a path having a sensor), there is a risk that a fraudulent person will tamper with the sensor. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to efficiently inspect the game ball sorting device.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances as described above. To provide a game machine capable of preventing the occurrence of a game.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to another embodiment is
A game ball sorting device 5400 provided with an inflow port through which game balls can flow in, a detecting means for detecting passage of the game balls sorted by the game ball sorting device 5400, and a first start-up among the detecting means. A main control circuit 100 (specific game determination means) capable of determining whether or not to shift to a specific game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the mouth switch (specific detection means); , a gaming machine comprising
The game ball distribution device 5400 is a back side inflow port (also , Out port 5443) (first inflow port), and the second passage (similarly, a passage for guiding game balls circulating to the out port 5444) different from the inflow port on the back side. Another inflow port on the back side (similarly, the out port 5444) (second inflow port) that can be separated, and a second inflow port that is different from the inflow port on the back side and the inflow port on the other back side. 3 passage (similarly, the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the first starting port 5442) and the inflow port on the front side (similarly, the first starting port 5442) (the third inflow port), including
The first passage (similarly, the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443) is provided with the first start port switch (specific detection means),
The second passage (similarly, the passage that guides the game ball circulated to the out port 5444) is provided with an out port switch (detection means different from the specific detection means),
The detection means is not provided in the third passage (similarly, the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the first start port 5442),
From the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400, the back side inflow port (similarly, out port 5443) (first inflow port), and the other back side inflow port (similarly, out port 5444) (second inflow port), and the inflow port on the front side (similarly, the first start port 5442) (third inflow port) has an opening 5416 that allows the game ball to flow in,
The inflow port on the back side (similarly, the out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the other inflow port on the back side (similarly, the out port 5444) (second inflow port) It is provided at a position farther from the opening 5416 than the inlet (also the first starting port 5442) (the third inlet).

With such a configuration, in the game ball distribution device 5400 according to another embodiment, the inspection efficiency of the game ball distribution device 5400 is improved, and after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the sensor is tampered with. can be prevented.
More specifically, since the game ball can enter the croon 5440 without being distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, the first passage 5501 (specifically, the first passage (first implementation A passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443 according to the form), a second passage (Similarly, a passage that guides the game ball that has circulated to the out port 5444), and a third passage (Similarly, the first start The passage)) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the port 5442 can be inspected. As a result, for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is manufactured, the game ball sorting device 5400 can be efficiently inspected.
In addition, when the opening 5416 is provided, the cheater enters the game ball from the opening 5416 using fraudulent means and detects it with the sensor to obtain a prize ball or an advantageous game state. , the sensor itself may be tampered with. However, as described above, the front side inlet (similarly, the first starting port 5442) (the third inlet) having no sensor is the rear side inlet (similarly, the out port 5443) (the third inlet) having a sensor. 1 inflow port) and another back side inflow port (similarly, the out port 5444) (second inflow port). It is becoming difficult to tamper with sensors. In this way, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from tampering with the sensor.

Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is
a movable accessory unit 57 (a production device);
A sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of controlling the movable accessory unit 57 (effect device),
Out port switch 5473 (detection means for effect) is provided in the second passage (similarly, a passage for guiding game balls circulating to out port 5444),
The sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) can control the movable accessory unit 57 (effect device) based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the outlet switch 5473 (detection means for effect). It is.

With such a configuration, even if the cheater tries to let the game ball flow into the inflow port on the back side having the sensor (similarly, the out port 5443) (first inflow port), the profit of the player (specifically, to obtain a prize ball or an advantageous game state), which is an inlet for performance unrelated It is possible to prevent fraud because it creates a situation where it is stored.

1 pachinko game machine 3400 effect device 3421 base member 3421a to 3421c projection (base member engaging portion)
3422 reel seat 3422a to 3422c notch (reel seat member engaging portion)
C Design

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area on which game balls roll;
a passage area through which a game ball can pass;
a displacement member that can be displaced between a first position through which a game ball can easily pass and a second position through which a game ball can hardly pass through the passage area;
driving means for driving the displacement member;
a guideway for guiding a game ball to the passing area;
Fraud detection means for detecting predetermined fraud;
with
The driving means can generate a force for driving the displacement member in a direction different from the direction in which the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position,
driving direction changing means for changing the direction of the force generated by the driving means to a direction of movement from the first position to the second position;
the displacement member includes a connecting portion that can be connected to the driving direction changing means;
The driving means is arranged on the front side from the end of the driving direction changing means on the back side of the gaming machine,
At least a part of the fraud detection means is arranged on the front side of the driving means and the drive direction changing means on the back side of the game machine,
At least a part of the driving direction changing means is arranged on the rear surface side relative to the end portion of the fraud detecting means on the front side of the game machine when the displacement member is at the first position. and at least a part of the driving direction changing means is arranged to be located on the front side of the game machine front side end portion of the fraud detection means when the displacement member is at the second position,
At least a portion of the connecting portion is arranged on the rear side of an end portion of the fraud detecting means on the front side of the game machine when the displacement member is at the first position,
The taxiway is
a first guideway having a first deceleration means which is at least partly constituted by the displacement member arranged so as to vertically overlap the driving means and capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball;
At least a second guideway having a second deceleration means different from the first deceleration means capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball,
A gaming machine, wherein a game ball flowing down the second guideway can merge at a predetermined position of the first guideway.

Images